1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659 1660 1661 1662 1663 1664 1665 1666 1667 1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 2159 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 2306 2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365 2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427 2428 2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544 2545 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 2644 2645 2646 2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 2720 2721 2722 2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731 2732 2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765 2766 2767 2768 2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 2775 2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905 2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3127 3128 3129 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162 3163 3164 3165 3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 3215 3216 3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 3378 3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384 3385 3386 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 3415 3416 3417 3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3439 3440 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 3474 3475 3476 3477 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 3576 3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 3656 3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677 3678 3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700 3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 3724 3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 3732 3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3738 3739 3740 3741 3742 3743 3744 3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 3757 3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 3765 3766 3767 3768 3769 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 3827 3828 3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 3842 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 3848 3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 3862 3863 3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 3874 3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916 3917 3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 3944 3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 3970 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 3987 3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 4152 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 4362 4363 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388 4389 4390 4391 4392 4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4407 4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422 4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435 4436 4437 4438 4439 4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 4451 4452 4453 4454 4455 4456 4457 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 4492 4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 4521 4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617 4618 4619 4620 4621 4622 4623 4624 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653 4654 4655 4656 4657 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692 4693 4694 4695 4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715 4716 4717 4718 4719 4720 4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729 4730 4731 4732 4733 4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 4739 4740 4741 4742 4743 4744 4745 4746 4747 4748 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754 4755 4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 4777 4778 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 4784 4785 4786 4787 4788 4789 4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 4795 4796 4797 4798 4799 4800 4801 4802 4803 4804 4805 4806 4807 4808 4809 4810 4811 4812 4813 4814 4815 4816 4817 4818 4819 4820 4821 4822 4823 4824 4825 4826 4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835 4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 4848 4849 4850 4851 4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 4858 4859 4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 4899 4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 4921 4922 4923 4924 4925 4926 4927 4928 4929 4930 4931 4932 4933 4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 4941 4942 4943 4944 4945 4946 4947 4948 4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 4958 4959 4960 4961 4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971 4972 4973 4974 4975 4976 4977 4978 4979 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 4998 4999 5000 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051 5052 5053 5054 5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 5066 5067 5068 5069 5070 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 5076 5077 5078 5079 5080 5081 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090 5091 5092 5093 5094 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 5109 5110 5111 5112 5113 5114 5115 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 5128 5129 5130 5131 5132 5133 5134 5135 5136 5137 5138 5139 5140 5141 5142 5143 5144 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 5217 5218 5219 5220 5221 5222 5223 5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 5259 5260 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 5290 5291 5292 5293 5294 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 5300 5301 5302 5303 5304 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 5325 5326 5327 5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362 5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 5373
|
% generated by GAPDoc2LaTeX from XML source (Frank Luebeck)
\documentclass[a4paper,11pt]{report}
\usepackage{a4wide}
\sloppy
\pagestyle{myheadings}
\usepackage{amssymb}
\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage{makeidx}
\makeindex
\usepackage{color}
\definecolor{FireBrick}{rgb}{0.5812,0.0074,0.0083}
\definecolor{RoyalBlue}{rgb}{0.0236,0.0894,0.6179}
\definecolor{RoyalGreen}{rgb}{0.0236,0.6179,0.0894}
\definecolor{RoyalRed}{rgb}{0.6179,0.0236,0.0894}
\definecolor{LightBlue}{rgb}{0.8544,0.9511,1.0000}
\definecolor{Black}{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.0}
\definecolor{linkColor}{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.554}
\definecolor{citeColor}{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.554}
\definecolor{fileColor}{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.554}
\definecolor{urlColor}{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.554}
\definecolor{promptColor}{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.589}
\definecolor{brkpromptColor}{rgb}{0.589,0.0,0.0}
\definecolor{gapinputColor}{rgb}{0.589,0.0,0.0}
\definecolor{gapoutputColor}{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.0}
%% for a long time these were red and blue by default,
%% now black, but keep variables to overwrite
\definecolor{FuncColor}{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.0}
%% strange name because of pdflatex bug:
\definecolor{Chapter }{rgb}{0.0,0.0,0.0}
\definecolor{DarkOlive}{rgb}{0.1047,0.2412,0.0064}
\usepackage{fancyvrb}
\usepackage{mathptmx,helvet}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{textcomp}
\usepackage[
pdftex=true,
bookmarks=true,
a4paper=true,
pdftitle={Written with GAPDoc},
pdfcreator={LaTeX with hyperref package / GAPDoc},
colorlinks=true,
backref=page,
breaklinks=true,
linkcolor=linkColor,
citecolor=citeColor,
filecolor=fileColor,
urlcolor=urlColor,
pdfpagemode={UseNone},
]{hyperref}
\newcommand{\maintitlesize}{\fontsize{50}{55}\selectfont}
% write page numbers to a .pnr log file for online help
\newwrite\pagenrlog
\immediate\openout\pagenrlog =\jobname.pnr
\immediate\write\pagenrlog{PAGENRS := [}
\newcommand{\logpage}[1]{\protect\write\pagenrlog{#1, \thepage,}}
%% were never documented, give conflicts with some additional packages
\newcommand{\GAP}{\textsf{GAP}}
%% nicer description environments, allows long labels
\usepackage{enumitem}
\setdescription{style=nextline}
%% depth of toc
\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
%% command for ColorPrompt style examples
\newcommand{\gapprompt}[1]{\color{promptColor}{\bfseries #1}}
\newcommand{\gapbrkprompt}[1]{\color{brkpromptColor}{\bfseries #1}}
\newcommand{\gapinput}[1]{\color{gapinputColor}{#1}}
\begin{document}
\logpage{[ 0, 0, 0 ]}
\begin{titlepage}
\mbox{}\vfill
\begin{center}{\maintitlesize \textbf{\textsf{GAPDoc}\mbox{}}}\\
\vfill
\hypersetup{pdftitle=\textsf{GAPDoc}}
\markright{\scriptsize \mbox{}\hfill \textsf{GAPDoc} \hfill\mbox{}}
{\Huge ( Version 1.5.1 ) \mbox{}}\\[1cm]
{February 2012\mbox{}}\\[1cm]
\mbox{}\\[2cm]
{\Large \textbf{ Frank L{\"u}beck \mbox{}}}\\
{\Large \textbf{ Max Neunh{\"o}ffer \mbox{}}}\\
\hypersetup{pdfauthor= Frank L{\"u}beck ; Max Neunh{\"o}ffer }
\end{center}\vfill
\mbox{}\\
{\mbox{}\\
\small \noindent \textbf{ Frank L{\"u}beck } Email: \href{mailto://Frank.Luebeck@Math.RWTH-Aachen.De} {\texttt{Frank.Luebeck@Math.RWTH-Aachen.De}}\\
Homepage: \href{http://www.math.rwth-aachen.de/~Frank.Luebeck} {\texttt{http://www.math.rwth-aachen.de/\texttt{\symbol{126}}Frank.Luebeck}}}\\
{\mbox{}\\
\small \noindent \textbf{ Max Neunh{\"o}ffer } Email: \href{mailto://neunhoef at mcs.st-and.ac.uk} {\texttt{neunhoef at mcs.st-and.ac.uk}}\\
Homepage: \href{http://www-groups.mcs.st-and.ac.uk/~neunhoef/} {\texttt{http://www-groups.mcs.st-and.ac.uk/\texttt{\symbol{126}}neunhoef/}}}\\
\end{titlepage}
\newpage\setcounter{page}{2}
{\small
\section*{Copyright}
\logpage{[ 0, 0, 1 ]}
\index{License} {\copyright} 2000-2012 by Frank L{\"u}beck and Max Neunh{\"o}ffer
\textsf{GAPDoc} is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of
the \href{http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.html} {GNU General Public License} as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
or (at your option) any later version. \mbox{}}\\[1cm]
\newpage
\def\contentsname{Contents\logpage{[ 0, 0, 2 ]}}
\tableofcontents
\newpage
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{Introduction and Example}}\label{ch:intro}
\logpage{[ 1, 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7D4EE663818DA109}{}
{
The main purpose of the \textsf{GAPDoc} package is to define a file format for documentation of \textsf{GAP}-programs and -packages (see \cite{GAP4}). The problem is that such documentation should be readable in several output
formats. For example it should be possible to read the documentation inside
the terminal in which \textsf{GAP} is running (a text mode) and there should be a printable version in high
typesetting quality (produced by some version of {\TeX}). It is also popular to view \textsf{GAP}'s online help with a Web-browser via an HTML-version of the documentation.
Nowadays one can use {\LaTeX} and standard viewer programs to produce and view on the screen \texttt{dvi}- or \texttt{pdf}-files with full support of internal and external hyperlinks. Certainly there
will be other interesting document formats and tools in this direction in the
future.
Our aim is to find a \emph{format for writing} the documentation which allows a relatively easy translation into the output
formats just mentioned and which hopefully makes it easy to translate to
future output formats as well.
To make documentation written in the \textsf{GAPDoc} format directly usable, we also provide a set of programs, called converters,
which produce text-, hyperlinked {\LaTeX}- and HTML-output versions of a \textsf{GAPDoc} document. These programs are developed by the first named author. They run
completely inside \textsf{GAP}, i.e., no external programs are needed. You only need \texttt{latex} and \texttt{pdflatex} to process the {\LaTeX} output. These programs are described in Chapter{\nobreakspace}\ref{ch:conv}.
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{XML}}\label{sec:XML}
\logpage{[ 1, 1, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8590236E858F7E93}{}
{
\index{XML} The definition of the \textsf{GAPDoc} format uses XML, the ``eXtendible Markup Language''. This is a standard (defined by the W3C consortium, see \href{http://www.w3c.org} {\texttt{http://www.w3c.org}}) which lays down a syntax for adding markup to a document or to some data. It
allows to define document structures via introducing markup \emph{elements} and certain relations between them. This is done in a \emph{document type definition}. The file \texttt{gapdoc.dtd} contains such a document type definition and is the central part of the \textsf{GAPDoc} package.
The easiest way for getting a good idea about this is probably to look at an
example. The Appendix{\nobreakspace}\ref{app:3k+1} contains a short but complete \textsf{GAPDoc} document for a fictitious share package. In the next section we will go
through this document, explain basic facts about XML and the \textsf{GAPDoc} document type, and give pointers to more details in later parts of this
documentation.
In the last Section{\nobreakspace}\ref{sec:faq} of this introductory chapter we try to answer some general questions about the
decisions which lead to the \textsf{GAPDoc} package. }
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{A complete example}}\label{sec:3k+1expl}
\logpage{[ 1, 2, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7B47AFA881BFC9DC}{}
{
In this section we recall the lines from the example document in
Appendix{\nobreakspace}\ref{app:3k+1} and give some explanations.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
\end{Verbatim}
This line just tells a human reader and computer programs that the file is a
document with XML markup and that the text is encoded in the UTF-8 character
set (other common encodings are ASCII or ISO-8895-X encodings).
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<!-- A complete "fake package" documentation
-->
\end{Verbatim}
Everything in a XML file between ``\texttt{{\textless}!--}'' and ``\texttt{--{\textgreater}}'' is a comment and not part of the document content.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<!DOCTYPE Book SYSTEM "gapdoc.dtd">
\end{Verbatim}
This line says that the document contains markup which is defined in the
system file \texttt{gapdoc.dtd} and that the markup obeys certain rules defined in that file (the ending \texttt{dtd} means ``document type definition''). It further says that the actual content of the document consists of an
element with name ``Book''. And we can really see that the remaining part of the file is enclosed as
follows:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<Book Name="3k+1">
[...] (content omitted)
</Book>
\end{Verbatim}
This demonstrates the basics of the markup in XML. This part of the document
is an ``element''. It consists of the ``start tag'' \texttt{{\textless}Book Name="3k+1"{\textgreater}}, the ``element content'' and the ``end tag'' \texttt{{\textless}/Book{\textgreater}} (end tags always start with \texttt{{\textless}/}). This element also has an ``attribute'' \texttt{Name} whose ``value'' is \texttt{3k+1}.
If you know HTML, this will look familiar to you. But there are some important
differences: The element name \texttt{Book} and attribute name \texttt{Name} are \emph{case sensitive}. The value of an attribute must \emph{always} be enclosed in quotes. In XML \emph{every} element has a start and end tag (which can be combined for elements defined as ``empty'', see for example \texttt{{\textless}TableOfContents/{\textgreater}} below).
If you know {\LaTeX}, you are familiar with quite different types of markup, for example: The
equivalent of the \texttt{Book} element in {\LaTeX} is \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}begin\texttt{\symbol{123}}document\texttt{\symbol{125}}
... \texttt{\symbol{92}}end\texttt{\symbol{123}}document\texttt{\symbol{125}}}. The sectioning in {\LaTeX} is not done by explicit start and end markup, but implicitly via heading
commands like \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}section}. Other markup is done by using braces \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{123}}\texttt{\symbol{125}}} and putting some commands inside. And for mathematical formulae one can use
the \texttt{\$} for the start \emph{and} the end of the markup. In XML \emph{all} markup looks similar to that of the \texttt{Book} element.
The content of the book starts with a title page.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<TitlePage>
<Title>The <Package>ThreeKPlusOne</Package> Package</Title>
<Version>Version 42</Version>
<Author>Dummy Authr
<Email>3kplusone@dev.null</Email>
</Author>
<Copyright>©right; 2000 The Author. <P/>
You can do with this package what you want.<P/> Really.
</Copyright>
</TitlePage>
\end{Verbatim}
The content of the \texttt{TitlePage} element consists again of elements. In Chapter{\nobreakspace}\ref{DTD} we describe which elements are allowed within a \texttt{TitlePage} and that their ordering is prescribed in this case. In the (stupid) name of
the author you see that a German umlaut is used directly (in ISO-latin1
encoding).
Contrary to {\LaTeX}- or HTML-files this markup does not say anything about the actual layout of
the title page in any output version of the document. It just adds information
about the \emph{meaning} of pieces of text.
Within the \texttt{Copyright} element there are two more things to learn about XML markup. The \texttt{{\textless}P/{\textgreater}} is a complete element. It is a combined start and end tag. This shortcut is
allowed for elements which are defined to be always ``empty'', i.e., to have no content. You may have already guessed that \texttt{{\textless}P/{\textgreater}} is used as a paragraph separator. Note that empty lines do not separate
paragraphs (contrary to {\LaTeX}).
The other construct we see here is \texttt{\©right;}. This is an example of an ``entity'' in XML and is a macro for some substitution text. Here we use an entity as a
shortcut for a complicated expression which makes it possible that the term \emph{copyright} is printed as some text like \texttt{(C)} in text terminal output and as a copyright character in other output formats.
In \textsf{GAPDoc} we predefine some entities. Certain ``special characters'' must be typed via entities, for example ``{\textless}'', ``{\textgreater}'' and ``\&'' to avoid a misinterpretation as XML markup. It is possible to define
additional entities for your document inside the \texttt{{\textless}!DOCTYPE ...{\textgreater}} declaration, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{GDent}.
Note that elements in XML must always be properly nested, as in this example.
A construct like \texttt{{\textless}a{\textgreater}{\textless}b{\textgreater}...{\textless}/a{\textgreater}{\textless}/b{\textgreater}} is \emph{not} allowed.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<TableOfContents/>
\end{Verbatim}
This is another example of an ``empty element''. It just means that a table of contents for the whole document should be
included into any output version of the document.
After this the main text of the document follows inside certain sectioning
elements:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<Body>
<Chapter> <Heading>The <M>3k+1</M> Problem</Heading>
<Section Label="sec:theory"> <Heading>Theory</Heading>
[...] (content omitted)
</Section>
<Section> <Heading>Program</Heading>
[...] (content omitted)
</Section>
</Chapter>
</Body>
\end{Verbatim}
These elements are used similarly to ``\texttt{\symbol{92}}chapter'' and ``\texttt{\symbol{92}}section'' in {\LaTeX}. But note that the explicit end tags are necessary here.
The sectioning commands allow to assign an optional attribute ``Label''. This can be used for referring to a section inside the document.
The text of the first section starts as follows. The whitespace in the text is
unimportant and the indenting is not necessary.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
Let <M>k \in &NN;</M> be a natural number. We consider the
sequence <M>n(i, k), i \in &NN;,</M> with <M>n(1, k) = k</M> and
else
\end{Verbatim}
Here we come to the interesting question how to type mathematical formulae in
a \textsf{GAPDoc} document. We did not find any alternative for writing formulae in {\TeX} syntax. (There is MATHML, but even simple formulae contain a lot of markup,
become quite unreadable and they are cumbersome to type. Furthermore there
seem to be no tools available which translate such formulae in a nice way into {\TeX} and text.) So, formulae are essentially typed as in {\LaTeX}. (Actually, it is also possible to type unicode characters of some
mathematical symbols directly, or via an entity like the \texttt{\&NN;} above.) There are three types of elements containing formulae: ``M'', ``Math'' and ``Display''. The first two are for in-text formulae and the third is for displayed
formulae. Here ``M'' and ``Math'' are equivalent, when translating a \textsf{GAPDoc} document into {\LaTeX}. But they are handled differently for terminal text (and HTML) output. For
the content of an ``M''-element there are defined rules for a translation into well readable terminal
text. More complicated formulae are in ``Math'' or ``Display'' elements and they are just printed as they are typed in text output. So, to
make a section well readable inside a terminal window you should try to put as
many formulae as possible into ``M''-elements. In our example text we used the notation \texttt{n(i, k)} instead of \texttt{n{\textunderscore}i(k)} because it is easier to read in text mode. See Sections{\nobreakspace}\ref{GDformulae} and{\nobreakspace}\ref{sec:misc} for more details.
A few lines further on we find two non-internal references.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
problem, see <Cite Key="Wi98"/> or
<URL>http://mathsrv.ku-eichstaett.de/MGF/homes/wirsching/</URL>
\end{Verbatim}
The first within the ``Cite''-element is the citation of a book. In \textsf{GAPDoc} we use the widely used Bib{\TeX} database format for reference lists. This does not use XML but has a well
documented structure which is easy to parse. And many people have collections
of references readily available in this format. The reference list in an
output version of the document is produced with the empty element
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<Bibliography Databases="3k+1" />
\end{Verbatim}
close to the end of our example file. The attribute ``Databases'' give the name(s) of the database (\texttt{.bib}) files which contain the references.
Putting a Web-address into an ``URL''-element allows one to create a hyperlink in output formats which allow this.
The second section of our example contains a special kind of subsection
defined in \textsf{GAPDoc}.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<ManSection>
<Func Name="ThreeKPlusOneSequence" Arg="k[, max]"/>
<Description>
This function computes for a natural number <A>k</A> the
beginning of the sequence <M>n(i, k)</M> defined in section
<Ref Sect="sec:theory"/>. The sequence stops at the first
<M>1</M> or at <M>n(<A>max</A>, k)</M>, if <A>max</A> is
given.
<Example>
gap> ThreeKPlusOneSequence(101);
"Sorry, not yet implemented. Wait for Version 84 of the package"
</Example>
</Description>
</ManSection>
\end{Verbatim}
A ``ManSection'' contains the description of some function, operation, method, filter and so
on. The ``Func''-element describes the name of a \emph{function} (there are also similar elements ``Oper'', ``Meth'', ``Filt'' and so on) and names for its arguments, optional arguments enclosed in square
brackets. See Section{\nobreakspace}\ref{sec:mansect} for more details.
In the ``Description'' we write the argument names as ``A''-elements. A good description of a function should usually contain an example
of its use. For this there are some verbatim-like elements in \textsf{GAPDoc}, like ``Example'' above (here, clearly, whitespace matters which causes a slightly strange
indenting).
The text contains an internal reference to the first section via the
explicitly defined label \texttt{sec:theory}.
The first section also contains a ``Ref''-element which refers to the function described here. Note that there is no
explicit label for such a reference. The pair \texttt{{\textless}Func Name="ThreeKPlusOneSequence" Arg="k[, max]"/{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}Ref Func="ThreeKPlusOneSequence"/{\textgreater}} does the cross referencing (and hyperlinking if possible) implicitly via the
name of the function.
Here is one further element from our example document which we want to
explain.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=from 3k+1.xml]
<TheIndex/>
\end{Verbatim}
This is again an empty element which just says that an output version of the
document should contain an index. Many entries for the index are generated
automatically because the ``Func'' and similar elements implicitly produce such entries. It is also possible to
include explicit additional entries in the index. }
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Some questions}}\label{sec:faq}
\logpage{[ 1, 3, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X79A97B867F45E5C7}{}
{
\begin{description}
\item[{Are those XML files too ugly to read and edit?}] Just have a look and decide yourself. The markup needs more characters than
most {\TeX} or {\LaTeX} markup. But the structure of the document is easier to see. If you configure
your favorite editor well, you do not need more key strokes for typing the
markup than in {\LaTeX}.
\item[{Why do we not use {\LaTeX} alone?}] {\LaTeX} is good for writing books. But {\LaTeX} files are generally difficult to parse and to process to other output formats
like text for browsing in a terminal window or HTML (or new formats which may
become popular in the future). \textsf{GAPDoc} markup is one step more abstract than {\LaTeX} insofar as it describes meaning instead of appearance of text. The inner
workings of {\LaTeX} are too complicated to learn without pain, which makes it difficult to
overcome problems that occur occasionally.
\item[{Why XML and not a newly defined markup language?}] XML is a well defined standard that is more and more widely used. Lots of
people have thought about it. Years of experience with SGML went into the
design. It is easy to explain, easy to parse and lots of tools are available,
there will be more in the future.
\end{description}
}
}
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{How To Type a \textsf{GAPDoc} Document}}\label{HowEnter}
\logpage{[ 2, 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X820EBE207DCC0655}{}
{
In this chapter we give a more formal description of what you need to start to
type documentation in \textsf{GAPDoc} XML format. Many details were already explained by example in
Section{\nobreakspace}\ref{sec:3k+1expl} of the introduction.
We do \emph{not} answer the question ``How to \emph{write} a \textsf{GAPDoc} document?'' in this chapter. You can (hopefully) find an answer to this question by
studying the example in the introduction, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{sec:3k+1expl}, and learning about more details in the reference Chapter{\nobreakspace}\ref{DTD}.
The definite source for all details of the official XML standard with useful
annotations is:
\href{http://www.xml.com/axml/axml.html} {\texttt{http://www.xml.com/axml/axml.html}}
Although this document must be quite technical, it is surprisingly well
readable.
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{General XML Syntax}}\label{EnterXML}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7B3A544986A1A9EA}{}
{
We will now discuss the pieces of text which can occur in a general XML
document. We start with those pieces which do not contribute to the actual
content of the document.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Head of XML Document}}\label{XMLhead}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X84E8D39687638CF0}{}
{
Each XML document should have a head which states that it is an XML document
in some encoding and which XML-defined language is used. In case of a \textsf{GAPDoc} document this should always look as in the following example.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=@|A,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE Book SYSTEM "gapdoc.dtd">
\end{Verbatim}
See{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLenc} for a remark on the ``encoding'' statement.
(There may be local entity definitions inside the \texttt{DOCTYPE} statement, see Subsection{\nobreakspace}\ref{GDent} below.) }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Comments}}\label{XMLcomment}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X780C79EB85C32138}{}
{
A ``comment'' in XML starts with the character sequence ``\texttt{{\textless}!--}'' and ends with the sequence ``\texttt{--{\textgreater}}''. Between these sequences there must not be two adjacent dashes ``\texttt{--}''. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Processing Instructions}}\label{XMLprocinstr}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X82DBCCAD8358BB63}{}
{
A ``processing instruction'' in XML starts with the character sequence ``\texttt{{\textless}?}'' followed by a name (``\texttt{xml}'' is only allowed at the very beginning of the document to declare it being an
XML document, see \ref{XMLhead}). After that any characters may follow, except that the ending sequence ``\texttt{?{\textgreater}}'' must not occur within the processing instruction. }
{\nobreakspace}
And now we turn to those parts of the document which contribute to its actual
content.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Names in XML and Whitespace}}\label{XMLnames}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 4 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7A0FB16C7FEC0B53}{}
{
A ``name'' in XML (used for element and attribute identifiers, see below) must start with
a letter (in the encoding of the document) or with a colon ``\texttt{:}'' or underscore ``\texttt{{\textunderscore}}'' character. The following characters may also be digits, dots ``\texttt{.}'' or dashes ``\texttt{-}''.
This is a simplified description of the rules in the standard, which are
concerned with lots of unicode ranges to specify what a ``letter'' is.
Sequences only consisting of the following characters are considered as \emph{whitespace}: blanks, tabs, carriage return characters and new line characters. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Elements}}\label{XMLel}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 5 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X79B130FC7906FB4C}{}
{
The actual content of an XML document consists of ``elements''. An element has some ``content'' with a leading ``start tag'' (\ref{XMLstarttag}) and a trailing ``end tag'' (\ref{XMLendtag}). The content can contain further elements but they must be properly nested.
One can define elements whose content is always empty, those elements can also
be entered with a single combined tag (\ref{XMLcombtag}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Start Tags}}\label{XMLstarttag}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 6 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7DD1DCB783588BD5}{}
{
A ``start-tag'' consists of a less-than-character ``\texttt{{\textless}}'' directly followed (without whitespace) by an element name (see{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLnames}), optional attributes, optional whitespace, and a greater-than-character ``\texttt{{\textgreater}}''.
An ``attribute'' consists of some whitespace and then its name followed by an equal sign ``\texttt{=}'' which is optionally enclosed by whitespace, and the attribute value, which is
enclosed either in single or double quotes. The attribute value may not
contain the type of quote used as a delimiter or the character ``\texttt{{\textless}}'', the character ``\texttt{\&}'' may only appear to start an entity, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLent}. We describe in{\nobreakspace}\ref{AttrValRules} how to enter special characters in attribute values.
Note especially that no whitespace is allowed between the starting ``\texttt{{\textless}}'' character and the element name. The quotes around an attribute value cannot be
omitted. The names of elements and attributes are \emph{case sensitive}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{End Tags}}\label{XMLendtag}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 7 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7E5A567E83005B62}{}
{
An ``end tag'' consists of the two characters ``\texttt{{\textless}/}'' directly followed by the element name, optional whitespace and a
greater-than-character ``\texttt{{\textgreater}}''. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Combined Tags for Empty Elements}}\label{XMLcombtag}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 8 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X843A02A88514D919}{}
{
Elements which always have empty content can be written with a single tag.
This looks like a start tag (see{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLstarttag}) \emph{except} that the trailing greater-than-character ``\texttt{{\textgreater}}'' is substituted by the two character sequence ``\texttt{/{\textgreater}}''. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Entities}}\label{XMLent}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 9 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X78FB56C77B1F391A}{}
{
An ``entity'' in XML is a macro for some substitution text. There are two types of entities.
A ``character entity'' can be used to specify characters in the encoding of the document (can be
useful for entering non-ASCII characters which you cannot manage to type in
directly). They are entered with a sequence ``\texttt{\&\#}'', directly followed by either some decimal digits or an ``\texttt{x}'' and some hexadecimal digits, directly followed by a semicolon ``\texttt{;}''. Using such a character entity is just equivalent to typing the corresponding
character directly.
Then there are references to ``named entities''. They are entered with an ampersand character ``\texttt{\&}'' directly followed by a name which is directly followed by a semicolon ``\texttt{;}''. Such entities must be declared somewhere by giving a substitution text. This
text is included in the document and the document is parsed again afterwards.
The exact rules are a bit subtle but you probably want to use this only in
simple cases. Predefined entities for \textsf{GAPDoc} are described in \ref{XMLspchar} and \ref{GDent}.
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Special Characters in XML}}\label{XMLspchar}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 10 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X84A95A19801EDE76}{}
{
We have seen that the less-than-character ``\texttt{{\textless}}'' and the ampersand character ``\texttt{\&}'' start a tag or entity reference in XML. To get these characters into the
document text one has to use entity references, namely ``\texttt{\<}'' to get ``\texttt{{\textless}}'' and ``\texttt{\&}'' to get ``\texttt{\&}''. Furthermore ``\texttt{\>}'' must be used to get ``\texttt{{\textgreater}}'' when the string ``\texttt{]]{\textgreater}}'' appears in element content (and not as delimiter of a \texttt{CDATA} section explained below).
Another possibility is to use a \texttt{CDATA} statement explained in{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLcdata}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Rules for Attribute Values}}\label{AttrValRules}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 11 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7F49E7AD785AED22}{}
{
Attribute values can contain entities which are substituted recursively. But
except for the entities \< or a character entity it is not allowed that a
{\textless} character is introduced by the substitution (there is no XML
parsing for evaluating the attribute value, just entity substitutions). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{CDATA}}}\label{XMLcdata}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 12 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X80D9026B7CB7B32F}{}
{
Pieces of text which contain many characters which can be misinterpreted as
markup can be enclosed by the character sequences ``\texttt{{\textless}![CDATA[}'' and ``\texttt{]]{\textgreater}}''. Everything between these sequences is considered as content of the document
and is not further interpreted as XML text. All the rules explained so far in
this section do \emph{not apply} to such a part of the document. The only document content which cannot be
entered directly inside a \texttt{CDATA} statement is the sequence ``\texttt{]]{\textgreater}}''. This can be entered as ``\texttt{]]\>}'' outside the \texttt{CDATA} statement.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
A nesting of tags like <a> <b> </a> </b> is not allowed.
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Encoding of an XML Document}}\label{XMLenc}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 13 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8709BD337DA09ED5}{}
{
We suggest to use the UTF-8 encoding for writing \textsf{GAPDoc} XML documents. But the tools described in Chapter \ref{ch:conv} also work with ASCII or the various ISO-8859-X encodings (ISO-8859-1 is also
called latin1 and covers most special characters for western European
languages). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Well Formed and Valid XML Documents}}\label{XMLvalid}
\logpage{[ 2, 1, 14 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8561F07A81CABDD6}{}
{
We want to mention two further important words which are often used in the
context of XML documents. A piece of text becomes a ``well formed'' XML document if all the formal rules described in this section are fulfilled.
But this says nothing about the content of the document. To give this content
a meaning one needs a declaration of the element and corresponding attribute
names as well as of named entities which are allowed. Furthermore there may be
restrictions how such elements can be nested. This \emph{definition of an XML based markup language} is done in a ``document type definition''. An XML document which contains only elements and entities declared in such a
document type definition and obeys the rules given there is called ``valid (with respect to this document type definition)''.
The main file of the \textsf{GAPDoc} package is \texttt{gapdoc.dtd}. This contains such a definition of a markup language. We are not going to
explain the formal syntax rules for document type definitions in this section.
But in Chapter{\nobreakspace}\ref{DTD} we will explain enough about it to understand the file \texttt{gapdoc.dtd} and so the markup language defined there. }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Entering \textsf{GAPDoc} Documents}}\label{EnterGD}
\logpage{[ 2, 2, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7E9C91B77D1D0A4A}{}
{
Here are some additional rules for writing \textsf{GAPDoc} XML documents.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Other special characters}}\label{otherspecchar}
\logpage{[ 2, 2, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X79171E047B069F94}{}
{
As \textsf{GAPDoc} documents are used to produce {\LaTeX} and HTML documents, the question arises how to deal with characters with a
special meaning for other applications (for example ``\texttt{\&}'', ``\texttt{\#}'', ``\texttt{\$}'', ``\texttt{\%}'', ``\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{126}}}'', ``\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}}'', ``\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{123}}}'', ``\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{125}}}'', ``\texttt{{\textunderscore}}'', ``\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{94}}}'', ``\texttt{{\nobreakspace}}'' (this is a non-breakable space, ``\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{126}}}'' in {\LaTeX}) have a special meaning for {\LaTeX} and ``\texttt{\&}'', ``\texttt{{\textless}}'', ``\texttt{{\textgreater}}'' have a special meaning for HTML (and XML). In \textsf{GAPDoc} you can usually just type these characters directly, it is the task of the
converter programs which translate to some output format to take care of such
special characters. The exceptions to this simple rule are:
\begin{itemize}
\item \& and {\textless} must be entered as \texttt{\&} and \texttt{\<} as explained in \ref{XMLspchar}.
\item The content of the \textsf{GAPDoc} elements \texttt{{\textless}M{\textgreater}}, \texttt{{\textless}Math{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}Display{\textgreater}} is {\LaTeX} code, see \ref{MathForm}.
\item The content of an \texttt{{\textless}Alt{\textgreater}} element with \texttt{Only} attribute contains code for the specified output type, see \ref{Alt}.
\end{itemize}
Remark: In former versions of \textsf{GAPDoc} one had to use particular entities for all the special characters mentioned
above (\texttt{\&tamp;}, \texttt{\&hash;}, \texttt{\$}, \texttt{\&percent;}, \texttt{\˜}, \texttt{\&bslash;}, \texttt{\&obrace;}, \texttt{\&cbrace;}, \texttt{\&uscore;}, \texttt{\&circum;}, \texttt{\&tlt;}, \texttt{\&tgt;}). These are no longer needed, but they are still defined for backwards
compatibility with older \textsf{GAPDoc} documents. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Mathematical Formulae}}\label{GDformulae}
\logpage{[ 2, 2, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7EAE0C5A835F126F}{}
{
Mathematical formulae in \textsf{GAPDoc} are typed as in {\LaTeX}. They must be the content of one of three types of \textsf{GAPDoc} elements concerned with mathematical formulae: ``\texttt{Math}'', ``\texttt{Display}'', and ``\texttt{M}'' (see Sections{\nobreakspace}\ref{Math} and{\nobreakspace}\ref{M} for more details). The first two correspond to {\LaTeX}'s math mode and display math mode. The last one is a special form of the ``\texttt{Math}'' element type, that imposes certain restrictions on the content. On the other
hand the content of an ``\texttt{M}'' element is processed in a well defined way for text terminal or HTML output.
The ``\texttt{Display}'' element also has an attribute such that its content is processed as in ``\texttt{M}'' elements.
Note that the content of these element is {\LaTeX} code, but the special characters ``\texttt{{\textless}}'' and ``\texttt{\&}'' for XML must be entered via the entities described in{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLspchar} or by using a \texttt{CDATA} statement, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLcdata}.
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{More Entities}}\label{GDent}
\logpage{[ 2, 2, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7BDFF6D37FBED400}{}
{
In \textsf{GAPDoc} there are some more predefined entities: \begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}\hline
\texttt{\&GAP;}&
\textsf{GAP}\\
\hline
\texttt{\&GAPDoc;}&
\textsf{GAPDoc}\\
\hline
\texttt{\&TeX;}&
{\TeX}\\
\hline
\texttt{\&LaTeX;}&
{\LaTeX}\\
\hline
\texttt{\&BibTeX;}&
Bib{\TeX}\\
\hline
\texttt{\&MeatAxe;}&
\textsf{MeatAxe}\\
\hline
\texttt{\&XGAP;}&
\textsf{XGAP}\\
\hline
\texttt{\©right;}&
{\copyright}\\
\hline
\texttt{\ }&
``{\nobreakspace}''\\
\hline
\texttt{\–}&
{\textendash}\\
\hline
\end{tabular}\\[2mm]
\textbf{Table: }Predefined Entities in the \textsf{GAPDoc} system\end{center}
Here \texttt{\ } is a non-breakable space character.
Additional entities are defined for some mathematical symbols, see \ref{MathForm} for more details.
One can define further local entities right inside the head
(see{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLhead}) of a \textsf{GAPDoc} XML document as in the following example.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE Book SYSTEM "gapdoc.dtd"
[ <!ENTITY MyEntity "some longish <E>text</E> possibly with markup">
]>
\end{Verbatim}
These additional definitions go into the \texttt{{\textless}!DOCTYPE} tag in square brackets. Such new entities are used like this: \texttt{\&MyEntity;}
}
}
}
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{The Document Type Definition}}\label{DTD}
\logpage{[ 3, 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7859CFF180D52D49}{}
{
In this chapter we first explain what a ``document type definition'' is and then describe \texttt{gapdoc.dtd} in detail. That file together with the current chapter define how a \textsf{GAPDoc} document has to look like. It can be found in the main directory of the \textsf{GAPDoc} package and it is reproduced in Appendix{\nobreakspace}\ref{GAPDocdtd}.
We do not give many examples in this chapter which is more intended as a
formal reference for all \textsf{GAPDoc} elements. Instead we provide an extra document with book name \texttt{GAPDocExample} (also accessible from the \textsf{GAP} online help). This uses all the constructs introduced in this chapter and you
can easily compare the source code and how it looks like in the different
output formats. Furthermore recall that many basic things about XML markup
were already explained by example in the introductory chapter{\nobreakspace}\ref{ch:intro}.
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{What is a DTD?}}\logpage{[ 3, 1, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7B76F6F786521F6B}{}
{
A document type definition (DTD) is a formal declaration of how an XML
document has to be structured. It is itself structured such that programs that
handle documents can read it and treat the documents accordingly. There are
for example parsers and validity checkers that use the DTD to validate an XML
document, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLvalid}.
The main thing a DTD does is to specify which elements may occur in documents
of a certain document type, how they can be nested, and what attributes they
can or must have. So, for each element there is a rule.
Note that a DTD can \emph{not} ensure that a document which is ``valid'' also makes sense to the converters! It only says something about the formal
structure of the document.
For the remaining part of this chapter we have divided the elements of \textsf{GAPDoc} documents into several subsets, each of which will be discussed in one of the
next sections.
See the following three subsections to learn by example, how a DTD works. We
do not want to be too formal here, but just enable the reader to understand
the declarations in \texttt{gapdoc.dtd}. For precise descriptions of the syntax of DTD's see again the official
standard in:
{\nobreakspace}{\nobreakspace}\href{http://www.xml.com/axml/axml.html} {\texttt{http://www.xml.com/axml/axml.html}}
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Overall Document Structure}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7DB0F9E57879CC76}{}
{
A \textsf{GAPDoc} document contains on its top level exactly one element with name \texttt{Book}. This element is declared in the DTD as follows:
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Book{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7D27228D7E68473E}{}
{
\index{Book@\texttt{Book}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Book (TitlePage,
TableOfContents?,
Body,
Appendix*,
Bibliography?,
TheIndex?)>
<!ATTLIST Book Name CDATA #REQUIRED>
\end{Verbatim}
After the keyword \texttt{ELEMENT} and the name \texttt{Book} there is a list in parentheses. This is a comma separated list of names of
elements which can occur (in the given order) in the content of a \texttt{Book} element. Each name in such a list can be followed by one of the characters ``\texttt{?}'', ``\texttt{*}'' or ``\texttt{+}'', meaning that the corresponding element can occur zero or one time, an
arbitrary number of times, or at least once, respectively. Without such an
extra character the corresponding element must occur exactly once. Instead of
one name in this list there can also be a list of elements names separated by ``\texttt{|}'' characters, this denotes any element with one of the names (i.e., ``\texttt{|}'' means ``or'').
So, the \texttt{Book} element must contain first a \texttt{TitlePage} element, then an optional \texttt{TableOfContents} element, then a \texttt{Body} element, then zero or more elements of type \texttt{Appendix}, then an optional \texttt{Bibliography} element, and finally an optional element of type \texttt{TheIndex}.
Note that \emph{only} these elements are allowed in the content of the \texttt{Book} element. No other elements or text is allowed in between. An exception of this
is that there may be whitespace between the end tag of one and the start tag
of the next element - this should be ignored when the document is processed to
some output format. An element like this is called an element with ``element content''.
The second declaration starts with the keyword \texttt{ATTLIST} and the element name \texttt{Book}. After that there is a triple of whitespace separated parameters (in general
an arbitrary number of such triples, one for each allowed attribute name). The
first (\texttt{Name}) is the name of an attribute for a \texttt{Book} element. The second (\texttt{CDATA}) is always the same for all of our declarations, it means that the value of
the attribute consists of ``character data''. The third parameter \texttt{\#REQUIRED} means that this attribute must be specified with any \texttt{Book} element. Later we will also see optional attributes which are declared as \texttt{\#IMPLIED}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}TitlePage{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8643EEF587FC8AD4}{}
{
\index{TitlePage@\texttt{TitlePage}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT TitlePage (Title, Subtitle?, Version?, TitleComment?,
Author+, Date?, Address?, Abstract?, Copyright?,
Acknowledgements? , Colophon? )>
\end{Verbatim}
Within this element information for the title page is collected. Note that
more than one author can be specified. The elements must appear in this order
because there is no sensible way to specify in a DTD something like ``the following elements may occur in any order but each exactly once''.
Before going on with the other elements inside the \texttt{Book} element we explain the elements for the title page. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Title{\textgreater}}}}\label{Title}
\logpage{[ 3, 2, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X85C1D07A84F1F736}{}
{
\index{Title@\texttt{Title}} \label{Text}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Title (%Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
Here is the last construct you need to understand for reading \texttt{gapdoc.dtd}. The expression ``\texttt{\%Text;}'' is a so-called ``parameter entity''. It is something like a macro within the DTD. It is defined as follows: \label{InnerText}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ENTITY % Text "%InnerText; | List | Enum | Table">
\end{Verbatim}
This means, that every occurrence of ``\texttt{\%Text;}'' in the DTD is replaced by the expression \label{Innertext}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
%InnerText; | List | Enum | Table
\end{Verbatim}
which is then expanded further because of the following definition:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ENTITY % InnerText "#PCDATA |
Alt |
Emph | E |
Par | P | Br |
Keyword | K | Arg | A | Quoted | Q | Code | C |
File | F | Button | B | Package |
M | Math | Display |
Example | Listing | Log | Verb |
URL | Email | Homepage | Address | Cite | Label |
Ref | Index" >
\end{Verbatim}
These are the only two parameter entities we are using. They expand to lists
of element names which are explained in the sequel \emph{and} the keyword \texttt{\#PCDATA} (concatenated with the ``or'' character ``\texttt{|}'').
So, the element (\texttt{Title}) is of so-called ``mixed content'': It can contain \emph{parsed character data} which does not contain further markup (\texttt{\#PCDATA}) or any of the other above mentioned elements. Mixed content must always have
the asterisk qualifier (like in \texttt{Title}) such that any sequence of elements (of the above list) and character data
can be contained in a \texttt{Title} element.
The \texttt{\%Text;} parameter entity is used in all places in the DTD, where ``normal text'' should be allowed, including lists, enumerations, and tables, but \emph{no} sectioning elements.
The \texttt{\%InnerText;} parameter entity is used in all places in the DTD, where ``inner text'' should be allowed. This means, that no structures like lists, enumerations,
and tables are allowed. This is used for example in headings.
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Subtitle{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 4 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X81B6D8D679A42915}{}
{
\index{Subtitle@\texttt{Subtitle}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Subtitle (%Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
Contains the subtitle of the document. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Version{\textgreater}}}}\label{Version}
\logpage{[ 3, 2, 5 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8064BA177E9D23B8}{}
{
\index{Version@\texttt{Version}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Version (#PCDATA|Alt)*>
\end{Verbatim}
Note that the version can only contain character data and no further markup
elements (except for \texttt{Alt}, which is necessary to resolve the entities described in \ref{GDent}). The converters will \emph{not} put the word ``Version'' in front of the text in this element. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}TitleComment{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 6 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7C2765047A1561EB}{}
{
\index{TitleComment@\texttt{TitleComment}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT TitleComment (%Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
Sometimes a title and subtitle are not sufficient to give a rough idea about
the content of a package. In this case use this optional element to specify an
additional text for the front page of the book. This text should be short, use
the \texttt{Abstract} element (see{\nobreakspace}\ref{elAbstract}) for longer explanations. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Author{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 7 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X846067D18467D228}{}
{
\index{Author@\texttt{Author}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Author (%Text;)*> <!-- There may be more than one Author! -->
\end{Verbatim}
As noted in the comment there may be more than one element of this type. This
element should contain the name of an author and probably an \texttt{Email}-address and/or WWW-\texttt{Homepage} element for this author, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{elEmail} and{\nobreakspace}\ref{elHomepage}. You can also specify an individual postal address here, instead of using the \texttt{Address} element described below, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{elAddress}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Date{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 8 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X87C47AD378268979}{}
{
\index{Date@\texttt{Date}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Date (#PCDATA)>
\end{Verbatim}
Only character data is allowed in this element which gives a date for the
document. No automatic formatting is done. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Address{\textgreater}}}}\label{elAddress}
\logpage{[ 3, 2, 9 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7B84029079583E6E}{}
{
\index{Date@\texttt{Address}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Address (#PCDATA|Alt|Br)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This optional element can be used to specify a postal address of the author or
the authors. If there are several authors with different addresses then put
the \texttt{Address} elements inside the \texttt{Author} elements.
Use the \texttt{Br} element (see{\nobreakspace}\ref{Br}) to mark the line breaks in the usual formatting of the address on a letter.
Note that often it is not necessary to use this element because a postal
address is easy to find via a link to a personal web page. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Abstract{\textgreater}}}}\label{elAbstract}
\logpage{[ 3, 2, 10 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7CF09C0F82D16612}{}
{
\index{Abstract@\texttt{Abstract}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Abstract (%Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element contains an abstract of the whole book. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Copyright{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 11 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X823232338648B1D7}{}
{
\index{Copyright@\texttt{Copyright}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Copyright (%Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used for the copyright notice. Note the \texttt{\©right;} entity as described in section \ref{GDent}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Acknowledgements{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 12 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X868A17B2849FEB84}{}
{
\index{Acknowledgements@\texttt{Acknowledgements}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Acknowledgements (%Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element contains the acknowledgements. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Colophon{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 13 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X87AF74847BEA348D}{}
{
\index{Colophon@\texttt{Colophon}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Colophon (%Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
The ``colophon'' page is used to say something about the history of a document. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}TableOfContents{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 2, 14 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X81F18BDE7B3182F4}{}
{
\index{TableOfContents@\texttt{TableOfContents}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT TableOfContents EMPTY>
\end{Verbatim}
This element may occur in the \texttt{Book} element after the \texttt{TitlePage} element. If it is present, a table of contents is generated and inserted into
the document. Note that because this element is declared to be \texttt{EMPTY} one can use the abbreviation
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
<TableOfContents/>
\end{Verbatim}
to denote this empty element. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Bibliography{\textgreater}} }}\label{Bibliography}
\logpage{[ 3, 2, 15 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X857F84507B5CED2A}{}
{
\index{Bibliography@\texttt{Bibliography}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Bibliography EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Bibliography Databases CDATA #REQUIRED
Style CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element may occur in the \texttt{Book} element after the last \texttt{Appendix} element. If it is present, a bibliography section is generated and inserted
into the document. The attribute \texttt{Databases} must be specified, the names of several data files can be specified, separated
by commas.
Two kinds of files can be specified in \texttt{Databases}: The first are Bib{\TeX} files as defined in{\nobreakspace}\cite[Appendix B]{La85}. Such files must have a name with extension \texttt{.bib}, and in \texttt{Databases} the name must be given \emph{without} this extension. The second are files in BibXMLext format as defined in
Section{\nobreakspace}\ref{BibXMLformat}. These files must have an extension \texttt{.xml} and in \texttt{Databases} the \emph{full} name must be specified.
We suggest to use the BibXMLext format because it allows to produce
potentially nicer bibliography entries in text and HTML documents.
A bibliography style may be specified with the \texttt{Style} attribute. The optional \texttt{Style} attribute (for {\LaTeX} output of the document) must also be specified without the \texttt{.bst} extension (the default is \texttt{alpha}). See also section \ref{Cite} for a description of the \texttt{Cite} element which is used to include bibliography references into the text.
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}TheIndex{\textgreater}}}}\label{TheIndex}
\logpage{[ 3, 2, 16 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X80ACB0AA7FC414E4}{}
{
\index{TheIndex@\texttt{TheIndex}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT TheIndex EMPTY>
\end{Verbatim}
This element may occur in the \texttt{Book} element after the \texttt{Bibliography} element. If it is present, an index is generated and inserted into the
document. There are elements in \textsf{GAPDoc} which implicitly generate index entries (e.g., \texttt{Func} (\ref{Func})) and there is an element \texttt{Index} (\ref{Index}) for explicitly adding index entries. }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Sectioning Elements}}\logpage{[ 3, 3, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X80E2AD7481DD69D9}{}
{
A \textsf{GAPDoc} book is divided into \emph{chapters}, \emph{sections}, and \emph{subsections}. The idea is of course, that a chapter consists of sections, which in turn
consist of subsections. However for the sake of flexibility, the rules are not
too restrictive. Firstly, text is allowed everywhere in the body of the
document (and not only within sections). Secondly, the chapter level may be
omitted. The exact rules are described below.
\emph{Appendices} are a flavor of chapters, occurring after all regular chapters. There is a
special type of subsection called ``\texttt{ManSection}''. This is a subsection devoted to the description of a function, operation or
variable. It is analogous to a manpage in the UNIX environment. Usually each
function, operation, method, and so on should have its own \texttt{ManSection}.
Cross referencing is done on the level of \texttt{Subsection}s, respectively \texttt{ManSection}s. The topics in \textsf{GAP}'s online help are also pointing to subsections. So, they should not be too
long.
We start our description of the sectioning elements ``top-down'':
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Body{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 3, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X85FB286D82BA5300}{}
{
\index{Body@\texttt{Body}} The \texttt{Body} element marks the main part of the document. It must occur after the \texttt{TableOfContents} element. There is a big difference between \emph{inside} and \emph{outside} of this element: Whereas regular text is allowed nearly everywhere in the \texttt{Body} element and its subelements, this is not true for the \emph{outside}. This has also implications on the handling of whitespace. \emph{Outside} superfluous whitespace is usually ignored when it occurs between elements. \emph{Inside} of the \texttt{Body} element whitespace matters because character data is allowed nearly
everywhere. Here is the definition in the DTD:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Body ( %Text;| Chapter | Section )*>
\end{Verbatim}
The fact that \texttt{Chapter} and \texttt{Section} elements are allowed here leads to the possibility to omit the chapter level
entirely in the document. For a description of \texttt{\%Text;} see \ref{Text}.
(Remark: The purpose of this element is to make sure that a \emph{valid} \textsf{GAPDoc} document has a correct overall structure, which is only possible when the top
element \texttt{Book} has element content.) }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Chapter{\textgreater}}}}\label{Chapter}
\logpage{[ 3, 3, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X81A68C117E39FA60}{}
{
\index{Chapter@\texttt{Chapter}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Chapter (%Text;| Heading | Section)*>
<!ATTLIST Chapter Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
\end{Verbatim}
A \texttt{Chapter} element can have a \texttt{Label} attribute, such that this chapter can be referenced later on with a \texttt{Ref} element (see section \ref{Ref}). Note that you have to specify a label to reference the chapter as there is
no automatic labelling!
\texttt{Chapter} elements can contain text (for a description of \texttt{\%Text;} see \ref{Text}), \texttt{Section} elements, and \texttt{Heading} elements.
The following \emph{additional} rule cannot be stated in the DTD because we want a \texttt{Chapter} element to have mixed content. There must be \emph{exactly one} \texttt{Heading} element in the \texttt{Chapter} element, containing the heading of the chapter. Here is its definition: }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Heading{\textgreater}}}}\label{Heading}
\logpage{[ 3, 3, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X82F09E29814C7A72}{}
{
\index{Heading@\texttt{Heading}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Heading (%InnerText;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used for headings in \texttt{Chapter}, \texttt{Section}, \texttt{Subsection}, and \texttt{Appendix} elements. It may only contain \texttt{\%InnerText;} (for a description see \ref{InnerText}).
Each of the mentioned sectioning elements must contain exactly one direct \texttt{Heading} element (i.e., one which is not contained in another sectioning element). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Appendix{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 3, 4 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7951B5C482C59057}{}
{
\index{Appendix@\texttt{Appendix}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Appendix (%Text;| Heading | Section)*>
<!ATTLIST Appendix Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
\end{Verbatim}
The \texttt{Appendix} element behaves exactly like a \texttt{Chapter} element (see \ref{Chapter}) except for the position within the document and the numbering. While
chapters are counted with numbers (1., 2., 3., ...) the appendices are counted
with capital letters (A., B., ...).
Again there is an optional \texttt{Label} attribute used for references. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Section{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 3, 5 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X795D46507CE20232}{}
{
\index{Section@\texttt{Section}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Section (%Text;| Heading | Subsection | ManSection)*>
<!ATTLIST Section Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
\end{Verbatim}
A \texttt{Section} element can have a \texttt{Label} attribute, such that this section can be referenced later on with a \texttt{Ref} element (see section \ref{Ref}). Note that you have to specify a label to reference the section as there is
no automatic labelling!
\texttt{Section} elements can contain text (for a description of \texttt{\%Text;} see \ref{Text}), \texttt{Heading} elements, and subsections.
There must be exactly one direct \texttt{Heading} element in a \texttt{Section} element, containing the heading of the section.
Note that a subsection is either a \texttt{Subsection} element or a \texttt{ManSection} element. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Subsection{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 3, 6 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7A9AC7787E8163DC}{}
{
\index{Subsection@\texttt{Subsection}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Subsection (%Text;| Heading)*>
<!ATTLIST Subsection Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
\end{Verbatim}
The \texttt{Subsection} element can have a \texttt{Label} attribute, such that this subsection can be referenced later on with a \texttt{Ref} element (see section \ref{Ref}). Note that you have to specify a label to reference the subsection as there
is no automatic labelling!
\texttt{Subsection} elements can contain text (for a description of \texttt{\%Text;} see \ref{Text}), and \texttt{Heading} elements.
There must be exactly one \texttt{Heading} element in a \texttt{Subsection} element, containing the heading of the subsection.
Another type of subsection is a \texttt{ManSection}, explained now: }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{ManSection{\textendash}a special kind of subsection}}\label{sec:mansect}
\logpage{[ 3, 4, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X877B8B7C7EDD09E9}{}
{
\texttt{ManSection}s are intended to describe a function, operation, method, variable, or some
other technical instance. It is analogous to a manpage in the UNIX
environment.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}ManSection{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 4, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7E24999A86DAEB60}{}
{
\index{ManSection@\texttt{ManSection}} \index{Description@\texttt{Description}} \index{Returns@\texttt{Returns}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT ManSection ( Heading?,
((Func, Returns?) | (Oper, Returns?) |
(Meth, Returns?) | (Filt, Returns?) |
(Prop, Returns?) | (Attr, Returns?) |
Var | Fam | InfoClass)+, Description )>
<!ATTLIST ManSection Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
<!ELEMENT Returns (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Description (%Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
The \texttt{ManSection} element can have a \texttt{Label} attribute, such that this subsection can be referenced later on with a \texttt{Ref} element (see section \ref{Ref}). But this is probably rarely necessary because the elements \texttt{Func} and so on (explained below) generate automatically labels for cross
referencing.
The content of a \texttt{ManSection} element is one or more elements describing certain items in \textsf{GAP}, each of them optionally followed by a \texttt{Returns} element, followed by a \texttt{Description} element, which contains \texttt{\%Text;} (see \ref{Text}) describing it. (Remember to include examples in the description as often as
possible, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{Log}). The classes of items \textsf{GAPDoc} knows of are: functions (\texttt{Func}), operations (\texttt{Oper}), methods (\texttt{Meth}), filters (\texttt{Filt}), properties (\texttt{Prop}), attributes (\texttt{Attr}), variables (\texttt{Var}), families (\texttt{Fam}), and info classes (\texttt{InfoClass}). One \texttt{ManSection} should only describe several of such items when these are very closely
related.
Each element for an item corresponding to a \textsf{GAP} function can be followed by a \texttt{Returns} element. In output versions of the document the string ``Returns: '' will be put in front of the content text. The text in the \texttt{Returns} element should usually be a short hint about the type of object returned by
the function. This is intended to give a good mnemonic for the use of a
function (together with a good choice of names for the formal arguments).
\texttt{ManSection}s are also sectioning elements which count as subsections. Usually there
should be no \texttt{Heading}-element in a \texttt{ManSection}, in that case a heading is generated automatically from the first \texttt{Func}-like element. Sometimes this default behaviour does not look appropriate, for
example when there are several \texttt{Func}-like elements. For such cases an optional \texttt{Heading} is allowed. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Func{\textgreater}}}}\label{Func}
\logpage{[ 3, 4, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X87CA42C681B95BCE}{}
{
\index{Func@\texttt{Func}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Func EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Func Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to specify the usage of a function. The \texttt{Name} attribute is required and its value is the name of the function. The value of
the \texttt{Arg} attribute (also required) contains the full list of arguments including
optional parts, which are denoted by square brackets. The argument names can
be separated by whitespace, commas or the square brackets for the optional
arguments, like \texttt{"grp[,{\nobreakspace}elm]"} or \texttt{"xx[y[z]{\nobreakspace}]"}. If \textsf{GAP} options are used, this can be followed by a colon \texttt{:} and one or more assignments, like \texttt{"n[,{\nobreakspace}r]: tries := 100"}.
The name of the function is also used as label for cross referencing. When the
name of the function appears in the text of the document it should \emph{always} be written with the \texttt{Ref} element, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{Ref}. This allows to use a unique typesetting style for function names and
automatic cross referencing.
If the optional \texttt{Label} attribute is given, it is appended (with a colon \texttt{:} in between) to the name of the function for cross referencing purposes. The
text of the label can also appear in the document text. So, it should be a
kind of short explanation.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
<Func Arg="x[, y]" Name="LibFunc" Label="for my objects"/>
\end{Verbatim}
The optional \texttt{Comm} attribute should be a short description of the function, usually at most one
line long (this is currently nowhere used).
This element automatically produces an index entry with the name of the
function and, if present, the text of the \texttt{Label} attribute as subentry (see also{\nobreakspace}\ref{TheIndex} and{\nobreakspace}\ref{Index}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Oper{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 4, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X82684F9E8461DFC7}{}
{
\index{Oper@\texttt{Oper}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Oper EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Oper Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to specify the usage of an operation. The attributes are used exactly
in the same way as in the \texttt{Func} element (see \ref{Func}).
Note that multiple descriptions of the same operation may occur in a document
because there may be several declarations in \textsf{GAP}. Furthermore there may be several \texttt{ManSection}s for methods of this operation (see{\nobreakspace}\ref{Meth}) which also use the same name. For reference purposes these must be
distinguished by different \texttt{Label} attributes. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Meth{\textgreater}}}}\label{Meth}
\logpage{[ 3, 4, 4 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X780247227AC3340B}{}
{
\index{Meth@\texttt{Meth}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Meth EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Meth Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to specify the usage of a method. The attributes are used exactly in
the same way as in the \texttt{Func} element (see \ref{Func}).
Frequently, an operation is implemented by several different methods.
Therefore it seems to be interesting to document them independently. This is
possible by using the same method name in different \texttt{ManSection}s. It is however required that these subsections and those describing the
corresponding operation are distinguished by different \texttt{Label} attributes. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Filt{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 4, 5 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7BFBED2C8766065E}{}
{
\index{Filt@\texttt{Filt}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Filt EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Filt Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #IMPLIED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED
Type CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to specify the usage of a filter. The first four attributes are used
in the same way as in the \texttt{Func} element (see \ref{Func}), except that the \texttt{Arg} attribute is optional.
The \texttt{Type} attribute can be any string, but it is thought to be something like ``\texttt{Category}'' or ``\texttt{Representation}''. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Prop{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 4, 6 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X81A6364E79DBE958}{}
{
\index{Prop@\texttt{Prop}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Prop EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Prop Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to specify the usage of a property. The attributes are used exactly in
the same way as in the \texttt{Func} element (see \ref{Func}).
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Attr{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 4, 7 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7B0AA7E98373249D}{}
{
\index{Attr@\texttt{Attr}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Attr EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Attr Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to specify the usage of an attribute (in \textsf{GAP}). The attributes are used exactly in the same way as in the \texttt{Func} element (see \ref{Func}).
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Var{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 4, 8 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7D4982A27D773098}{}
{
\index{Var@\texttt{Var}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Var EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Var Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to document a global variable. The attributes are used exactly in the
same way as in the \texttt{Func} element (see \ref{Func}) except that there is no \texttt{Arg} attribute.
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Fam{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 4, 9 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7DF346F7795CB5C1}{}
{
\index{Fam@\texttt{Fam}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Fam EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Fam Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to document a family. The attributes are used exactly in the same way
as in the \texttt{Func} element (see \ref{Func}) except that there is no \texttt{Arg} attribute.
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}InfoClass{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 4, 10 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X84367BDE795E0C56}{}
{
\index{InfoClass@\texttt{InfoClass}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT InfoClass EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST InfoClass Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used within a \texttt{ManSection} element to document an info class. The attributes are used exactly in the same
way as in the \texttt{Func} element (see \ref{Func}) except that there is no \texttt{Arg} attribute.
}
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Cross Referencing and Citations}}\logpage{[ 3, 5, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X78595FB585569617}{}
{
Cross referencing in the \textsf{GAPDoc} system is somewhat different to the usual {\LaTeX} cross referencing in so far, that a reference knows ``which type of object'' it is referencing. For example a ``reference to a function'' is distinguished from a ``reference to a chapter''. The idea of this is, that the markup must contain this information such that
the converters can produce better output. The HTML converter can for example
typeset a function reference just as the name of the function with a link to
the description of the function, or a chapter reference as a number with a
link in the other case.
Referencing is done with the \texttt{Ref} element:
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Ref{\textgreater}}}}\label{Ref}
\logpage{[ 3, 5, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X865F20E386B6DA49}{}
{
\index{Ref@\texttt{Ref}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Ref EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Ref Func CDATA #IMPLIED
Oper CDATA #IMPLIED
Meth CDATA #IMPLIED
Filt CDATA #IMPLIED
Prop CDATA #IMPLIED
Attr CDATA #IMPLIED
Var CDATA #IMPLIED
Fam CDATA #IMPLIED
InfoClass CDATA #IMPLIED
Chap CDATA #IMPLIED
Sect CDATA #IMPLIED
Subsect CDATA #IMPLIED
Appendix CDATA #IMPLIED
Text CDATA #IMPLIED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
BookName CDATA #IMPLIED
Style (Text | Number) #IMPLIED> <!-- normally automatic -->
\end{Verbatim}
The \texttt{Ref} element is defined to be \texttt{EMPTY}. If one of the attributes \texttt{Func}, \texttt{Oper}, \texttt{Meth}, \texttt{Prop}, \texttt{Attr}, \texttt{Var}, \texttt{Fam}, \texttt{InfoClass}, \texttt{Chap}, \texttt{Sect}, \texttt{Subsect}, \texttt{Appendix} is given then there must be exactly one of these, making the reference one to
the corresponding object. The \texttt{Label} attribute can be specified in addition to make the reference unique, for
example if more than one method with a given name is present. (Note that there
is no way to specify in the DTD that exactly one of the first listed
attributes must be given, this is an additional rule.)
A reference to a \texttt{Label} element defined below (see \ref{Label}) is done by giving the \texttt{Label} attribute and optionally the \texttt{Text} attribute. If the \texttt{Text} attribute is present its value is typeset in place of the \texttt{Ref} element, if linking is possible (for example in HTML). If this is not
possible, the section number is typeset. This type of reference is also used
for references to tables (see \ref{Table}).
An external reference into another book can be specified by using the \texttt{BookName} attribute. In this case the \texttt{Label} attribute or, if this is not given, the function or section like attribute, is
used to resolve the reference. The generated reference points to the first hit
when asking ``?book name: label'' inside \textsf{GAP}.
The optional attribute \texttt{Style} can take only the values \texttt{Text} and \texttt{Number}. It can be used with references to sectioning units and it gives a hint to
the converter programs, whether an explicit section number is generated or
text. Normally all references to sections generate numbers and references to a \textsf{GAP} object generate the name of the corresponding object with some additional link
or sectioning information, which is the behavior of \texttt{Style="Text"}. In case \texttt{Style="Number"} in all cases an explicit section number is generated. So
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
<Ref Subsect="Func" Style="Text"/> described in section
<Ref Subsect="Func" Style="Number"/>
\end{Verbatim}
produces: \hyperref[Func]{`\texttt{{\textless}Func{\textgreater}}'} described in section \ref{Func}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Label{\textgreater}}}}\label{Label}
\logpage{[ 3, 5, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8653BAF279C7A817}{}
{
\index{Label@\texttt{Label}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Label EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Label Name CDATA #REQUIRED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to define a label for referencing a certain position in
the document, if this is possible. If an exact reference is not possible (like
in a printed version of the document) a reference to the corresponding
subsection is generated. The value of the \texttt{Name} attribute must be unique under all \texttt{Label} elements. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Cite{\textgreater}}}}\label{Cite}
\logpage{[ 3, 5, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X855B311D7C33A50E}{}
{
\index{Cite@\texttt{Cite}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Cite EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Cite Key CDATA #REQUIRED
Where CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is for bibliography citations. It is \texttt{EMPTY} by definition. The attribute \texttt{Key} is the key for a lookup in a Bib{\TeX} database that has to be specified in the \texttt{Bibliography} element (see \ref{Bibliography}). The value of the \texttt{Where} attribute specifies the position in the document as in the corresponding {\LaTeX} syntax \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}cite[Where value]\texttt{\symbol{123}}Key
value\texttt{\symbol{125}}}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Index{\textgreater}}}}\label{Index}
\logpage{[ 3, 5, 4 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7D2B1F278577D2D5}{}
{
\index{Index@\texttt{Index}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Index (%InnerText;|Subkey)*>
<!ATTLIST Index Key CDATA #IMPLIED
Subkey CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Subkey (%InnerText;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element generates an index entry. The text within the element is typeset
in the index entry, which is sorted under the value, that is specified in the \texttt{Key} and \texttt{Subkey} attributes. If they are not specified, the typeset text itself is used as the
key.
A subkey can be specified in the simpler version as an attribute, but then no
further markup can be used for the subkey. Optionally, the subkey text can be
given in a \texttt{Subkey} element, in this case the attribute value is used for sorting but the typeset
text is taken from the content of \texttt{Subkey}.
Note that all \texttt{Func} and similar elements automatically generate index entries. If the \texttt{TheIndex} element (\ref{TheIndex}) is not present in the document all \texttt{Index} elements are ignored. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}URL{\textgreater}}}}\label{URL}
\logpage{[ 3, 5, 5 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7C58A957852F867C}{}
{
\index{URL@\texttt{URL}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT URL (#PCDATA|Alt|Link|LinkText)*> <!-- Link, LinkText
variant for case where text needs further markup -->
<!ATTLIST URL Text CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- This is for output formats
that have links like HTML -->
<!ELEMENT Link (%InnerText;)*> <!-- the URL -->
<!ELEMENT LinkText (%InnerText;)*> <!-- text for links, can contain markup -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is for references into the internet. It specifies an URL and
optionally a text which can be used for a link (like in HTML or PDF versions
of the document). This can be specified in two ways: Either the URL is given
as element content and the text is given in the optional \texttt{Text} attribute (in this case the text cannot contain further markup), or the
element contains the two elements \texttt{Link} and \texttt{LinkText} which in turn contain the URL and the text, respectively. The default value
for the text is the URL itself. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Email{\textgreater}}}}\label{elEmail}
\logpage{[ 3, 5, 6 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7FEB041D793E781B}{}
{
\index{Email@\texttt{Email}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Email (#PCDATA|Alt|Link|LinkText)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element type is the special case of an URL specifying an email address.
The content of the element should be the email address without any prefix like ``\texttt{mailto:}''. This address is typeset by all converters, also without any prefix. In the
case of an output document format like HTML the converter can produce a link
with a ``\texttt{mailto:}'' prefix. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Homepage{\textgreater}}}}\label{elHomepage}
\logpage{[ 3, 5, 7 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X81F135A886B732E6}{}
{
\index{Homepage@\texttt{Homepage}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Homepage (#PCDATA|Alt|Link|LinkText)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element type is the special case of an URL specifying a WWW-homepage. }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Structural Elements like Lists}}\logpage{[ 3, 6, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X840099DF83823686}{}
{
The \textsf{GAPDoc} system offers some limited access to structural elements like lists,
enumerations, and tables. Although it is possible to use all {\LaTeX} constructs one always has to think about other output formats. The elements in
this section are guaranteed to produce something reasonable in all output
formats.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}List{\textgreater}}}}\label{List}
\logpage{[ 3, 6, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7F97E8DD784F5CAA}{}
{
\index{List@\texttt{List}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT List ( ((Mark,Item)|(BigMark,Item)|Item)+ )>
<!ATTLIST List Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element produces a list. Each item in the list corresponds to an \texttt{Item} element. Every \texttt{Item} element is optionally preceded by a \texttt{Mark} element. The content of this is used as a marker for the item. Note that this
marker can be a whole word or even a sentence. It will be typeset in some
emphasized fashion and most converters will provide some indentation for the
rest of the item.
The \texttt{Only} and \texttt{Not} attributes can be used to specify, that the list is included into the output
by only one type of converter (\texttt{Only}) or all but one type of converter (\texttt{Not}). Of course at most one of the two attributes may occur in one element. The
following values are allowed as of now: ``\texttt{LaTeX}'', ``\texttt{HTML}'', and ``\texttt{Text}''. See also the \texttt{Alt} element in \ref{Alt} for more about text alternatives for certain converters. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Mark{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 6, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X786406A77C9F1CD6}{}
{
\index{Mark@\texttt{Mark}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Mark ( %InnerText;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used in the \texttt{List} element to mark items. See \ref{List} for an explanation. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Item{\textgreater}}}}\label{Item}
\logpage{[ 3, 6, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7D6BFC907F5FEF37}{}
{
\index{Item@\texttt{Item}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Item ( %Text;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used in the \texttt{List}, \texttt{Enum}, and \texttt{Table} elements to specify the items. See sections \ref{List}, \ref{Enum}, and \ref{Table} for further information. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Enum{\textgreater}}}}\label{Enum}
\logpage{[ 3, 6, 4 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7D3B2150818E3CD4}{}
{
\index{Enum@\texttt{Enum}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Enum ( Item+ )>
<!ATTLIST Enum Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used like the \texttt{List} element (see \ref{List}) except that the items must not have marks attached to them. Instead, the
items are numbered automatically. The same comments about the \texttt{Only} and \texttt{Not} attributes as above apply. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Table{\textgreater}}}}\label{Table}
\logpage{[ 3, 6, 5 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7BA7DA848347E2A9}{}
{
\index{Table@\texttt{Table}} \index{Caption@\texttt{{\textless}Caption{\textgreater}}} \index{Row@\texttt{{\textless}Row{\textgreater}}} \index{Align@\texttt{{\textless}Align{\textgreater}}} \index{HorLine@\texttt{{\textless}HorLine{\textgreater}}} \index{Item in Table@\texttt{{\textless}Item{\textgreater}} in \texttt{{\textless}Table{\textgreater}}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Table ( Caption?, (Row | HorLine)+ )>
<!ATTLIST Table Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED
Align CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!-- We allow | and l,c,r, nothing else -->
<!ELEMENT Row ( Item+ )>
<!ELEMENT HorLine EMPTY>
<!ELEMENT Caption ( %InnerText;)*>
\end{Verbatim}
A table in \textsf{GAPDoc} consists of an optional \texttt{Caption} element followed by a sequence of \texttt{Row} and \texttt{HorLine} elements. A \texttt{HorLine} element produces a horizontal line in the table. A \texttt{Row} element consists of a sequence of \texttt{Item} elements as they also occur in \texttt{List} and \texttt{Enum} elements. The \texttt{Only} and \texttt{Not} attributes have the same functionality as described in the \texttt{List} element in \ref{List}.
The \texttt{Align} attribute is written like a {\LaTeX} tabular alignment specifier but only the letters ``\texttt{l}'', ``\texttt{r}'', ``\texttt{c}'', and ``\texttt{|}'' are allowed meaning left alignment, right alignment, centered alignment, and a
vertical line as delimiter between columns respectively.
If the \texttt{Label} attribute is there, one can reference the table with the \texttt{Ref} element (see \ref{Ref}) using its \texttt{Label} attribute.
Usually only simple tables should be used. If you want a complicated table in
the {\LaTeX} output you should provide alternatives for text and HTML output. Note that in
HTML-4.0 there is no possibility to interpret the ``\texttt{|}'' column separators and \texttt{HorLine} elements as intended. There are lines between all columns and rows or no lines
at all. }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Types of Text}}\logpage{[ 3, 7, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7CA1E1327AFBA578}{}
{
This section covers the markup of text. Various types of ``text'' exist. The following elements are used in the \textsf{GAPDoc} system to mark them. They mostly come in pairs, one long name which is easier
to remember and a shortcut to make the markup ``lighter''.
Most of the following elements are thought to contain only character data and
no further markup elements. It is however necessary to allow \texttt{Alt} elements to resolve the entities described in section \ref{GDent}.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Emph{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}E{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 7, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7E07C12185A25EF7}{}
{
\index{Emph@\texttt{Emph}} \index{E@\texttt{E}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Emph (%InnerText;)*> <!-- Emphasize something -->
<!ELEMENT E (%InnerText;)*> <!-- the same as shortcut -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to emphasize some piece of text. It may contain \texttt{\%InnerText;} (see \ref{InnerText}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Quoted{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}Q{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 7, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X87FB13F57EF49C93}{}
{
\index{Quoted@\texttt{Quoted}} \index{Q@\texttt{Q}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Quoted (%InnerText;)*> <!-- Quoted (in quotes) text -->
<!ELEMENT Q (%InnerText;)*> <!-- Quoted text (shortcut) -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to put some piece of text into ``{\nobreakspace}''-quotes. It may contain \texttt{\%InnerText;} (see \ref{InnerText}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Keyword{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}K{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 7, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X86A11FA98045FE79}{}
{
\index{Keyword@\texttt{Keyword}} \index{K@\texttt{K}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Keyword (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Keyword -->
<!ELEMENT K (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Keyword (shortcut) -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to mark something as a \emph{keyword}. Usually this will be a \textsf{GAP} keyword such as ``\texttt{if}'' or ``\texttt{for}''. No further markup elements are allowed within this element except for the \texttt{Alt} element, which is necessary. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Arg{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}A{\textgreater}}}}\label{Arg}
\logpage{[ 3, 7, 4 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8502FFCF7DC7982B}{}
{
\index{Arg@\texttt{Arg}} \index{A@\texttt{A}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Arg (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Argument -->
<!ELEMENT A (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Argument (shortcut) -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used inside \texttt{Description}s in \texttt{ManSection}s to mark something as an \emph{argument} (of a function, operation, or such). It is guaranteed that the converters
typeset those exactly as in the definition of functions. No further markup
elements are allowed within this element. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Code{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}C{\textgreater}}}}\label{Code}
\logpage{[ 3, 7, 5 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X79C6755D80AEA4C1}{}
{
\index{Code@\texttt{Code}} \index{C@\texttt{C}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Code (#PCDATA|Arg|Alt)*> <!-- GAP code -->
<!ELEMENT C (#PCDATA|Arg|Alt)*> <!-- GAP code (shortcut) -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to mark something as a piece of \emph{code} like for example a \textsf{GAP} expression. It is guaranteed that the converters typeset this exactly as in
the \texttt{Listing} element (compare section \ref{Listing}). The only further markup elements allowed within this element are \texttt{{\textless}Arg{\textgreater}} elements (see \ref{Arg}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}File{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}F{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 7, 6 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7C30FEC078523528}{}
{
\index{File@\texttt{File}} \index{F@\texttt{F}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT File (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Filename -->
<!ELEMENT F (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Filename (shortcut) -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to mark something as a \emph{filename} or a \emph{pathname} in the file system. No further markup elements are allowed within this
element. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Button{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}B{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 7, 7 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X79AEA5068489EE6E}{}
{
\index{Button@\texttt{Button}} \index{B@\texttt{B}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Button (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- "Button" (also Menu, Key, ...) -->
<!ELEMENT B (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- "Button" (shortcut) -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to mark something as a \emph{button}. It can also be used for other items in a graphical user interface like \emph{menus}, \emph{menu entries}, or \emph{keys}. No further markup elements are allowed within this element. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Package{\textgreater}}}}\logpage{[ 3, 7, 8 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7B9BB2D878262083}{}
{
\index{Package@\texttt{Package}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Package (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- A package name -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to mark something as a name of a \emph{package}. This is for example used to define the entities \textsf{GAP}, \textsf{XGAP} or \textsf{GAPDoc} (see section \ref{GDent}). No further markup elements are allowed within this element. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Listing{\textgreater}}}}\label{Listing}
\logpage{[ 3, 7, 9 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X799961B67E34193D}{}
{
\index{Listing@\texttt{Listing}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Listing (#PCDATA)> <!-- This is just for GAP code listings -->
<!ATTLIST Listing Type CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- a comment about the type of
listed code, may appear in
output -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element is used to embed listings of programs into the document. Only
character data and no other elements are allowed in the content. You should \emph{not} use the character entities described in section \ref{GDent} but instead type the characters directly. Only the general XML rules from
section \ref{EnterXML} apply. Note especially the usage of \texttt{{\textless}![CDATA[} sections described there. It is guaranteed that all converters use a fixed
width font for typesetting \texttt{Listing} elements. Compare also the usage of the \texttt{Code} and \texttt{C} elements in \ref{Code}.
The \texttt{Type} attribute contains a comment about the type of listed code. It may appear in
the output. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Log{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}Example{\textgreater}}}}\label{Log}
\logpage{[ 3, 7, 10 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7C926CF778F54591}{}
{
\index{Log@\texttt{Log}} \index{Example@\texttt{Example}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Example (#PCDATA)> <!-- This is subject to the automatic
example checking mechanism -->
<!ELEMENT Log (#PCDATA)> <!-- This not -->
\end{Verbatim}
These two elements behave exactly like the \texttt{Listing} element (see \ref{Listing}). They are thought for protocols of \textsf{GAP} sessions. The only difference between the two is that \texttt{Example} sections are intended to be subject to an automatic manual checking mechanism
used to ensure the correctness of the \textsf{GAP} manual whereas \texttt{Log} is not touched by this (see section \ref{Sec:TestExample} for checking tools).
To get a good layout of the examples for display in a standard terminal we
suggest to use \texttt{SizeScreen([72]);} (see \texttt{SizeScreen} (\textbf{Reference: SizeScreen})) in your \textsf{GAP} session before producing the content of \texttt{Example} elements. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Verb{\textgreater}}}}\label{Verb}
\logpage{[ 3, 7, 11 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X80500AFD86ADECC5}{}
{
There is one further type of verbatim-like element.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Verb (#PCDATA)>
\end{Verbatim}
The content of such an element is guaranteed to be put into an output version
exactly as it is using some fixed width font. Before the content a new line is
started. If the line after the end of the start tag consists of whitespace
only then this part of the content is skipped.
This element is intended to be used together with the \texttt{Alt} element to specify pre-formatted ASCII alternatives for complicated \texttt{Display} formulae or \texttt{Table}s. }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Elements for Mathematical Formulae}}\label{MathForm}
\logpage{[ 3, 8, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8145F6B37C04AA0A}{}
{
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Math{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}Display{\textgreater}}}}\label{Math}
\logpage{[ 3, 8, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7B0254677AA56B5E}{}
{
\index{Math@\texttt{Math}} \index{Display@\texttt{Display}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!-- Normal TeX math mode formula -->
<!ELEMENT Math (#PCDATA|A|Arg|Alt)*>
<!-- TeX displayed math mode formula -->
<!ELEMENT Display (#PCDATA|A|Arg|Alt)*>
<!-- Mode="M" causes <M>-style formatting -->
<!ATTLIST Display Mode CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
These elements are used for mathematical formulae. As described in section \ref{GDformulae} they correspond to {\LaTeX}'s math and display math mode respectively.
The formulae are typed in as in {\LaTeX}, \emph{except} that the standard XML entities, see{\nobreakspace}\ref{XMLent} (in particular the characters \texttt{{\textless}} and \texttt{\&}), must be escaped - either by using the corresponding entities or by
enclosing the formula between ``\texttt{{\textless}![CDATA[}'' and ``\texttt{]]{\textgreater}}''. (The main reference for {\LaTeX} is \cite{La85}.)
It is also possible to use some unicode characters for mathematical symbols
directly, provided that it can be translated by \texttt{Encode} (\ref{Encode}) into \texttt{"LaTeX"} encoding and that \texttt{SimplifiedUnicodeString} (\ref{SimplifiedUnicodeString}) with arguments \texttt{"latin1"} and \texttt{"single"} returns something sensible. Currently, we support entities \texttt{\&CC;}, \texttt{\&ZZ;}, \texttt{\&NN;}, \texttt{\&PP;}, \texttt{\&QQ;}, \texttt{\&HH;}, \texttt{\&RR;} for the corresponding black board bold letters {\ensuremath{\mathbb C}},
{\ensuremath{\mathbb Z}}, {\ensuremath{\mathbb N}},{\ensuremath{\mathbb P}},
{\ensuremath{\mathbb Q}}, {\ensuremath{\mathbb H}} and {\ensuremath{\mathbb
R}}, respectively.
The only element type that is allowed within the formula elements is the \texttt{Arg} or \texttt{A} element (see \ref{Arg}), which is used to typeset identifiers that are arguments to \textsf{GAP} functions or operations.
If a \texttt{Display} element has an attribute \texttt{Mode} with value \texttt{"M"}, then the formula is formatted as in \texttt{M} elements (see{\nobreakspace}\ref{M}). Otherwise in text and HTML output the formula is shown as {\LaTeX} source code.
For simple formulae (and you should try to make all your formulae simple!)
attempt to use the \texttt{M} element or the \texttt{Mode="M"} attribute in \texttt{Display} for which there is a well defined translation into text, which can be used for
text and HTML output versions of the document. So, if possible try to avoid
the \texttt{Math} elements and \texttt{Display} elements without attribute or provide useful text substitutes for complicated
formulae via \texttt{Alt} elements (see{\nobreakspace}\ref{Alt} and{\nobreakspace}\ref{Verb}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}M{\textgreater}}}}\label{M}
\logpage{[ 3, 8, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8796A7577B29543A}{}
{
\index{M@\texttt{M}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!-- Math with well defined translation to text output -->
<!ELEMENT M (#PCDATA|A|Arg|Alt)*>
\end{Verbatim}
The ``\texttt{M}'' element type is intended for formulae in the running text for which there is a
sensible text version. For the {\LaTeX} version of a \textsf{GAPDoc} document the \texttt{M} and \texttt{Math} elements are equivalent. The remarks in \ref{Math} about special characters and the \texttt{Arg} element apply here as well. A document which has all formulae enclosed in \texttt{M} elements can be well readable in text terminal output and printed output
versions.
Compared to former versions of \textsf{GAPDoc} many more formulae can be put into \texttt{M} elements. Most modern terminal emulations support unicode characters and many
mathematical symbols can now be represented by such characters. But even if a
terminal can only display ASCII characters, the user will see some not too bad
representation of a formula.
As examples, here are some {\LaTeX} macros which have a sensible ASCII translation and are guaranteed to be
translated accordingly by text (and HTML) converters (for a full list of
handled Macros see \texttt{RecFields(TEXTMTRANSLATIONS)}): \begin{center}
\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}ast&
\texttt{*}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}bf&
\texttt{}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}bmod&
\texttt{mod}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}cdot&
\texttt{*}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}colon&
\texttt{:}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}equiv&
\texttt{=}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}geq&
\texttt{{\textgreater}=}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}germ&
\texttt{}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}hookrightarrow&
\texttt{-{\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}iff&
\texttt{{\textless}={\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}langle&
\texttt{{\textless}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}ldots&
\texttt{...}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}left&
\texttt{{\nobreakspace}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}leq&
\texttt{{\textless}=}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}leftarrow&
\texttt{{\textless}-}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}Leftarrow&
\texttt{{\textless}=}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}limits&
\texttt{{\nobreakspace}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}longrightarrow&
\texttt{--{\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}Longrightarrow&
\texttt{=={\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}mapsto&
\texttt{-{\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}mathbb&
\texttt{{\nobreakspace}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}mathop&
\texttt{{\nobreakspace}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}mid&
\texttt{|}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}pmod&
\texttt{mod}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}prime&
\texttt{'}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}rangle&
\texttt{{\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}right&
\texttt{{\nobreakspace}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}rightarrow&
\texttt{-{\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}Rightarrow&
\texttt{={\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}rm, \texttt{\symbol{92}}sf, \texttt{\symbol{92}}textrm,
\texttt{\symbol{92}}text&
\texttt{}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}setminus&
\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}thinspace&
\texttt{ }\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}times&
\texttt{x}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}to&
\texttt{-{\textgreater}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}vert&
\texttt{|}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}!&
\texttt{}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}},&
\texttt{}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}};&
\texttt{{\nobreakspace}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}\texttt{\symbol{123}}&
\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{123}}}\\
\hline
\texttt{\symbol{92}}\texttt{\symbol{125}}&
\texttt{\texttt{\symbol{125}}}\\
\hline
\end{tabular}\\[2mm]
\textbf{Table: }{\LaTeX} macros with special text translation\end{center}
In all other macros only the backslash is removed (except for some macros
describing more exotic symbols). Whitespace is normalized (to one blank) but
not removed. Note that whitespace is not added, so you may want to add a few
more spaces than you usually do in your {\LaTeX} documents.
Braces \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{123}}\texttt{\symbol{125}}} are removed in general, however pairs of double braces are converted to one
pair of braces. This can be used to write \texttt{{\textless}M{\textgreater}x\texttt{\symbol{94}}\texttt{\symbol{123}}12\texttt{\symbol{125}}{\textless}/M{\textgreater}} for \texttt{x\texttt{\symbol{94}}12} and \texttt{{\textless}M{\textgreater}x{\textunderscore}\texttt{\symbol{123}}\texttt{\symbol{123}}i+1\texttt{\symbol{125}}\texttt{\symbol{125}}{\textless}/M{\textgreater}} for \texttt{x{\textunderscore}\texttt{\symbol{123}}i+1\texttt{\symbol{125}}}.
}
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Everything else}}\label{sec:misc}
\logpage{[ 3, 9, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7A0D26B180BEDE37}{}
{
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Alt{\textgreater}}}}\label{Alt}
\logpage{[ 3, 9, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X817B08367FF43419}{}
{
\index{Alt@\texttt{Alt}} This element is used to specify alternatives for different output formats
within normal text. See also sections \ref{List}, \ref{Enum}, and \ref{Table} for alternatives in lists and tables.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Alt (%InnerText;)*> <!-- This is only to allow "Only" and
"Not" attributes for normal text -->
<!ATTLIST Alt Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
Of course exactly one of the two attributes must occur in one element. The
attribute values must be one word or a list of words, separated by spaces or
commas. The words which are currently recognized by the converter programs
contained in \textsf{GAPDoc} are: ``\texttt{LaTeX}'', ``\texttt{HTML}'', and ``\texttt{Text}''. If the \texttt{Only} attribute is specified then only the corresponding converter will include the
content of the element into the output document. If the \texttt{Not} attribute is specified the corresponding converter will ignore the content of
the element. You can use other words to specify special alternatives for other
converters of \textsf{GAPDoc} documents.
We fix a rule for handling the content of an \texttt{Alt} element with \texttt{Only} attribute. In their content code for the corresponding output format is
included directly. So, in case of HTML the content is HTML code, in case of {\LaTeX} the content is {\LaTeX} code. The converters don't apply any handling of special characters to this
content.
Within the element only \texttt{\%InnerText;} (see \ref{InnerText}) is allowed. This is to ensure that the same set of chapters, sections, and
subsections show up in all output formats. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Par{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}P{\textgreater}}}}\label{Par}
\logpage{[ 3, 9, 2 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X847CBC4380DBAC63}{}
{
\index{Par@\texttt{Par}} \index{P@\texttt{P}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Par EMPTY> <!-- this is intentionally empty! -->
<!ELEMENT P EMPTY> <!-- the same as shortcut -->
\end{Verbatim}
This \texttt{EMPTY} element marks the boundary of paragraphs. Note that an empty line in the input
does not mark a new paragraph as opposed to the {\LaTeX} convention.
(Remark: it would be much easier to parse a document and to understand its
sectioning and paragraph structure when there was an element whose \emph{content} is the text of a paragraph. But in practice many paragraph boundaries are
implicitly clear which would make it somewhat painful to enclose each
paragraph in extra tags. The introduction of the \texttt{P} or \texttt{Par} elements as above delegates this pain to the writer of a conversion program
for \textsf{GAPDoc} documents.) }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Br{\textgreater}}}}\label{Br}
\logpage{[ 3, 9, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7C910EF07C3FF929}{}
{
\index{Br@\texttt{Br}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Br EMPTY> <!-- a forced line break -->
\end{Verbatim}
This element can be used to force a line break in the output versions of a \textsf{GAPDoc} element, it does not start a new paragraph. Please, do not use this instead of
a \texttt{Par} element, this would often lead to ugly output versions of your document. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{\texttt{{\textless}Ignore{\textgreater}}}}\label{Ignore}
\logpage{[ 3, 9, 4 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X84855267801B3077}{}
{
\index{Ignore@\texttt{Ignore}}
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=From gapdoc.dtd]
<!ELEMENT Ignore (%Text;| Chapter | Section | Subsection | ManSection |
Heading)*>
<!ATTLIST Ignore Remark CDATA #IMPLIED>
\end{Verbatim}
This element can appear anywhere. Its content is ignored by the standard
converters. It can be used, for example, to include data which are not part of
the actual \textsf{GAPDoc} document, like source code, or to make not finished parts of the document
invisible.
Of course, one can use special converter programs which extract the contents
of \texttt{Ignore} elements. Information on the type of the content can be stored in the optional
attribute \texttt{Remark}. }
}
}
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{Distributing a Document into Several Files}}\label{Distributing}
\logpage{[ 4, 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7A3355C07F57C280}{}
{
In \textsf{GAPDoc} there are facilities to distribute a single document over several files. This
is for example interesting, if one wants to store the documentation of some
code in the same file as the code itself. Or, if one just wants to store
chapters of a document in separate files. There is a set of conventions how
this is done and some tools to collect the text for further processing.
The technique can also be used to distribute and collect other types of
documents into respectively from several files (e.g., source code, examples).
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{The Conventions}}\label{DistrConv}
\logpage{[ 4, 1, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7CE078A07E8256DC}{}
{
\index{Include@\texttt{{\textless}\#Include{\textgreater}}} \index{GAPDoc@\texttt{{\textless}\#GAPDoc{\textgreater}}} In this description we use the string \texttt{GAPDoc} for marking pieces of a document to collect.
Pieces of documentation that shall be incorporated into another document are
marked as follows:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
## <#GAPDoc Label="MyPiece">
## <E>This</E> is the piece.
## The hash characters are removed.
## <#/GAPDoc>
\end{Verbatim}
This piece is then included into another file by a statement like: \texttt{{\textless}\#Include Label="MyPiece"{\textgreater}} Here are the exact rules, how pieces are gathered:
\begin{itemize}
\item All lines up to a line containing the character sequence ``\texttt{{\textless}\#GAPDoc{\nobreakspace}Label="}'' (exactly one space character) are ignored. The characters on the same line
before this sequence are stored as ``prefix''. The characters after the sequence up to the next double quotes character are
stored as ``label''. All other characters in the line are ignored.
\item The following lines up to a line containing the character sequence ``\texttt{{\textless}\#/GAPDoc{\textgreater}}'' are stored under the label. These lines are processed as follows: The longest
possible substring from the beginning of the line that equals the
corresponding substring of the prefix is removed.
\end{itemize}
Having stored a list of labels and pieces of text gathered as above this can
be used as follows.
\begin{itemize}
\item In \textsf{GAPDoc} documentation files all statements of the form ``\texttt{{\textless}\#Include Label="Key"{\textgreater}}'' are replaced by the sequence of lines stored under the label \texttt{Key}.
\item Additionally, every occurrence of a statement of the form ``\texttt{{\textless}\#Include SYSTEM "Filename"{\textgreater}}'' is replaced by the whole file stored under the name \texttt{Filename} in the file system.
\item These substitutions are done recursively (although one should probably avoid
to use this extensively).
\end{itemize}
Here is another example:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
# # <#GAPDoc Label="AnotherPiece"> some characters
# # This text is not indented.
# This text is indented by one blank.
#Not indented.
#<#/GAPDoc>
\end{Verbatim}
replaces \texttt{{\textless}\#Include Label="AnotherPiece"{\textgreater}} by
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
This text is not indented.
This text is indented by one blank.
Not indented.
\end{Verbatim}
Since these rules are very simple it is quite easy to write a program in
almost any programming language which does this gathering of text pieces and
the substitutions. In \textsf{GAPDoc} there is the \textsf{GAP} function \texttt{ComposedDocument} (\ref{ComposedDocument}) which does this.
Note that the XML-tag-like markup we have used here is not a legal XML markup,
since the hash character is not allowed in element names. The mechanism
described here is a preprocessing step which composes a document. }
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{A Tool for Collecting a Document}}\logpage{[ 4, 2, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X81E07B0F83EBDA5F}{}
{
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{ComposedDocument}}
\logpage{[ 4, 2, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X857D77557D12559D}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ComposedDocument({\mdseries\slshape tagname, path, main, source[, info]})\index{ComposedDocument@\texttt{ComposedDocument}}
\label{ComposedDocument}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ComposedXMLString({\mdseries\slshape path, main, source[, info]})\index{ComposedXMLString@\texttt{ComposedXMLString}}
\label{ComposedXMLString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a document as string, or a list with this string and information about the
source positions
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tagname}} is the string used for the pseudo elements which mark the pieces of a document
to collect. (In \ref{DistrConv} we used \texttt{GAPDoc} as \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tagname}}. The second function \texttt{ComposedXMLString}\texttt{( ... )} is an abbreviation for \texttt{ComposedDocument}\texttt{("GAPDoc", ... )}.
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape path}} must be a path to some directory (as string or directory object), \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape main}} the name of a file in this directory and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape source}} a list of file names, all of these relative to \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape path}}. The document is constructed via the mechanism described in
Section{\nobreakspace}\ref{DistrConv}.
First the files given in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape source}} are scanned for chunks of the document marked by \texttt{{\textless}\#\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tagname}} Label="..."{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}/\#\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tagname}}{\textgreater}} pairs. Then the file \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape main}} is read and all \texttt{{\textless}\#Include ... {\textgreater}}-tags are substituted recursively by other files or chunks of documentation
found in the first step, respectively. If the optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape info}} is given and set to \texttt{true} this function returns a list \texttt{[str, origin]}, where \texttt{str} is a string containing the composed document and \texttt{origin} is a sorted list of entries of the form \texttt{[pos, filename, line]}. Here \texttt{pos} runs through all character positions of starting lines or text pieces from
different files in \texttt{str}. The \texttt{filename} and \texttt{line} describe the origin of this part of the collected document. Without the fourth
argument only the string \texttt{str} is returned.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@doc := ComposedDocument("GAPDoc", "/my/dir", "manual.xml", |
!gapprompt@>| !gapinput@["../lib/func.gd", "../lib/func.gi"], true);;|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{OriginalPositionDocument}}
\logpage{[ 4, 2, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X86D1141E7EDCAAC8}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{OriginalPositionDocument({\mdseries\slshape srcinfo, pos})\index{OriginalPositionDocument@\texttt{OriginalPositionDocument}}
\label{OriginalPositionDocument}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
A pair \texttt{[filename, linenumber]}.
Here \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape srcinfo}} must be a data structure as returned as second entry by \texttt{ComposedDocument} (\ref{ComposedDocument}) called with \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape info}}=\texttt{true}. It returns for a given position \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape pos}} in the composed document the file name and line number from which that text
was collected. }
}
}
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{The Converters and an XML Parser}}\label{ch:conv}
\logpage{[ 5, 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X845E7FDC7C082CC4}{}
{
The \textsf{GAPDoc} package contains a set of programs which allow us to convert a \textsf{GAPDoc} book into several output versions and to make them available to \textsf{GAP}'s online help.
Currently the following output formats are provided: text for browsing inside
a terminal running \textsf{GAP}, {\LaTeX} with \texttt{hyperref}-package for cross references via hyperlinks and HTML for reading with a
Web-browser.
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Producing Documentation from Source Files}}\label{MakeDoc}
\logpage{[ 5, 1, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7D1BB5867C13FA14}{}
{
Here we explain how to use the functions which are described in more detail in
the following sections. We assume that we have the main file \texttt{MyBook.xml} of a book \texttt{"MyBook"} in the directory \texttt{/my/book/path}. This contains \texttt{{\textless}\#Include ...{\textgreater}}-statements as explained in Chapter{\nobreakspace}\ref{Distributing}. These refer to some other files as well as pieces of text which are found in
the comments of some \textsf{GAP} source files \texttt{../lib/a.gd} and \texttt{../lib/b.gi} (relative to the path above). A Bib{\TeX} database \texttt{MyBook.bib} for the citations is also in the directory given above. We want to produce a
text-, \texttt{pdf-} and HTML-version of the document. (A {\LaTeX} version of the manual is produced, so it is also easy to compile \texttt{dvi}-, and postscript-versions.)
All the commands shown in this Section are collected in the single function \texttt{MakeGAPDocDoc} (\ref{MakeGAPDocDoc}).
First we construct the complete XML-document as a string with \texttt{ComposedDocument} (\ref{ComposedDocument}). This interprets recursively the \texttt{{\textless}\#Include ...{\textgreater}}-statements.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@path := Directory("/my/book/path");;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@main := "MyBook.xml";;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@files := ["../lib/a.gd", "../lib/b.gi"];;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bookname := "MyBook";;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@doc := ComposedDocument("GAPDoc", path, main, files, true);;|
\end{Verbatim}
Now \texttt{doc} is a list with two entries, the first is a string containing the XML-document,
the second gives information from which files and locations which part of the
document was collected. This is useful in the next step, if there are any
errors in the document.
Next we parse the document and store its structure in a tree-like data
structure. The commands for this are \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) and \texttt{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree} (\ref{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@r := ParseTreeXMLString(doc[1], doc[2]);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@CheckAndCleanGapDocTree(r);|
true
\end{Verbatim}
We start to produce a text version of the manual, which can be read in a
terminal (window). The command is \texttt{GAPDoc2Text} (\ref{GAPDoc2Text}). This produces a record with the actual text and some additional information.
The text can be written chapter-wise into files with \texttt{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles} (\ref{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles}). The names of these files are \texttt{chap0.txt}, \texttt{chap1.txt} and so on. The text contains some markup using ANSI escape sequences. This
markup is substituted by the \textsf{GAP} help system (user configurable) to show the text with colors and other
attributes. For the bibliography we have to tell \texttt{GAPDoc2Text} (\ref{GAPDoc2Text}) the location of the Bib{\TeX} database by specifying a \texttt{path} as second argument.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@t := GAPDoc2Text(r, path);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles(t, path);|
\end{Verbatim}
This command constructs all parts of the document including table of contents,
bibliography and index. The functions \texttt{FormatParagraph} (\ref{FormatParagraph}) for formatting text paragraphs and \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}) for reading Bib{\TeX} files with \textsf{GAP} may be of independent interest.
With the text version we have also produced the information which is used for
searching with \textsf{GAP}'s online help. Also, labels are produced which can be used by links in the
HTML- and \texttt{pdf}-versions of the manual.
Next we produce a {\LaTeX} version of the document. \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeX} (\ref{GAPDoc2LaTeX}) returns a string containing the {\LaTeX} source. The utility function \texttt{FileString} (\ref{FileString}) writes the content of a string to a file, we choose \texttt{MyBook.tex}.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@l := GAPDoc2LaTeX(r);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@FileString(Filename(path, Concatenation(bookname, ".tex")), l);|
\end{Verbatim}
Assuming that you have a sufficiently good installation of {\TeX} available (see \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeX} (\ref{GAPDoc2LaTeX}) for details) this can be processed with a series of commands like in the
following example.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
cd /my/book/path
pdflatex MyBook
bibtex MyBook
pdflatex MyBook
makeindex MyBook
pdflatex MyBook
mv MyBook.pdf manual.pdf
\end{Verbatim}
After this we have a \texttt{pdf}-version of the document in the file \texttt{manual.pdf}. It contains hyperlink information which can be used with appropriate
browsers for convenient reading of the document on screen (e.g., \texttt{xpdf} is nice because it allows remote calls to display named locations of the
document). Of course, we could also use other commands like \texttt{latex} or \texttt{dvips} to process the {\LaTeX} source file. Furthermore we have produced a file \texttt{MyBook.pnr} which is \textsf{GAP}-readable and contains the page number information for each (sub-)section of
the document.
We can add this page number information to the indexing information collected
by the text converter and then print a \texttt{manual.six} file which is read by \textsf{GAP} when the manual is loaded. This is done with \texttt{AddPageNumbersToSix} (\ref{AddPageNumbersToSix}) and \texttt{PrintSixFile} (\ref{PrintSixFile}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@AddPageNumbersToSix(r, Filename(path, "MyBook.pnr"));|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@PrintSixFile(Filename(path, "manual.six"), r, bookname);|
\end{Verbatim}
Finally we produce an HTML-version of the document and write it (chapter-wise)
into files \texttt{chap0.html}, \texttt{chap1.html} and so on. They can be read with any Web-browser. The commands are \texttt{GAPDoc2HTML} (\ref{GAPDoc2HTML}) and \texttt{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles} (\ref{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles}). We also add a link from \texttt{manual.html} to \texttt{chap0.html}. You probably want to copy stylesheet files into the same directory, see \ref{StyleSheets} for more details. The argument \texttt{path} of \texttt{GAPDoc2HTML} (\ref{GAPDoc2HTML}) specifies the directory containing the Bib{\TeX} database files.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@h := GAPDoc2HTML(r, path);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles(h, path);|
\end{Verbatim}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{MakeGAPDocDoc}}
\logpage{[ 5, 1, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X826F530686F4D052}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{MakeGAPDocDoc({\mdseries\slshape path, main, files, bookname[, gaproot]})\index{MakeGAPDocDoc@\texttt{MakeGAPDocDoc}}
\label{MakeGAPDocDoc}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
This function collects all the commands for producing a text-, \texttt{pdf}- and HTML-version of a \textsf{GAPDoc} document as described in Section{\nobreakspace}\ref{MakeDoc}. It checks the \texttt{.log} file from the call of \texttt{pdflatex} and reports if there are errors, warnings or overfull boxes.
\emph{Note:} If this function works for you depends on your operating system and installed
software. It will probably work on most \texttt{UNIX} systems with a standard {\LaTeX} installation. If the function doesn't work for you look at the source code and
adjust it to your system.
Here \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape path}} must be the directory (as string or directory object) containing the main file \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape main}} of the document (given with or without the \texttt{.xml} extension. The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape files}} is a list of (probably source code) files relative to \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape path}} which contain pieces of documentation which must be included in the document,
see Chapter{\nobreakspace}\ref{Distributing}. And \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bookname}} is the name of the book used by \textsf{GAP}'s online help. The optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape gaproot}} must be a string which gives the relative path from \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape path}} to the main \textsf{GAP} root directory. If this is given, the HTML files are produced with relative
paths to external books.
\index{MathJax@\textsf{MathJax}!in \texttt{MakeGAPDocDoc}} \texttt{MakeGAPDocDoc} can be called with additional arguments \texttt{"MathJax"}, \texttt{"Tth"} and/or \texttt{"MathML"}. If these are given additional variants of the HTML conversion are called,
see \texttt{GAPDoc2HTML} (\ref{GAPDoc2HTML}) for details.
It is possible to use \textsf{GAPDoc} with other languages than English, see \texttt{SetGapDocLanguage} (\ref{SetGapDocLanguage}) for more details.
}
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Parsing XML Documents}}\label{ParseXML}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7FE2AF49838D9034}{}
{
Arbitrary well-formed XML documents can be parsed and browsed by the following
functions.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{ParseTreeXMLString}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X847EB8498151D443}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString({\mdseries\slshape str[, srcinfo][, entitydict]})\index{ParseTreeXMLString@\texttt{ParseTreeXMLString}}
\label{ParseTreeXMLString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ParseTreeXMLFile({\mdseries\slshape fname[, entitydict]})\index{ParseTreeXMLFile@\texttt{ParseTreeXMLFile}}
\label{ParseTreeXMLFile}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a record which is root of a tree structure
The first function parses an XML-document stored in string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} and returns the document in form of a tree.
The optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape srcinfo}} must have the same format as in \texttt{OriginalPositionDocument} (\ref{OriginalPositionDocument}). If it is given then error messages refer to the original source of the text
with the problem.
With the optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape entitydict}} named entities can be given to the parser, for example entities which are
defined in the \texttt{.dtd}-file (which is not read by this parser). The standard XML-entities do not
need to be provided, and for \textsf{GAPDoc} documents the entity definitions from \texttt{gapdoc.dtd} are automatically provided. Entities in the document's \texttt{{\textless}!DOCTYPE} declaration are parsed and also need not to be provided here. The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape entitydict}} must be a record where each component name is an entity name (without the
surrounding \& and ;) to which is assigned its substitution string.
The second function is just a shortcut for \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString( StringFile(}\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape fname}}\texttt{), ... )}, see \texttt{StringFile} (\ref{StringFile}).
After these functions return the list of named entities which were known
during the parsing can be found in the record \texttt{ENTITYDICT}.
A node in the result tree corresponds to an XML element, or to some parsed
character data. In the first case it looks as follows:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example Node]
rec( name := "Book",
attributes := rec( Name := "EDIM" ),
content := [ ... list of nodes for content ...],
start := 312,
stop := 15610,
next := 15611 )
\end{Verbatim}
This means that \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}\texttt{\symbol{123}}[312..15610]\texttt{\symbol{125}}} looks like \texttt{{\textless}Book Name="EDIM"{\textgreater} ... content ...
{\textless}/Book{\textgreater}}.
The leaves of the tree encode parsed character data as in the following
example:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example Node]
rec( name := "PCDATA",
content := "text without markup " )
\end{Verbatim}
This function checks whether the XML document is \emph{well formed}, see \ref{XMLvalid} for an explanation. If an error in the XML structure is found, a break loop is
entered and the text around the position where the problem starts is shown.
With \texttt{Show();} one can browse the original input in the \texttt{Pager} (\textbf{Reference: Pager}), starting with the line where the error occurred. All entities are resolved
when they are either entities defined in the \textsf{GAPDoc} package (in particular the standard XML entities) or if their definition is
included in the \texttt{{\textless}!DOCTYPE ..{\textgreater}} tag of the document.
Note that \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} does not parse and interpret the corresponding document type definition (the \texttt{.dtd}-file given in the \texttt{{\textless}!DOCTYPE ..{\textgreater}} tag). Hence it also does not check the \emph{validity} of the document (i.e., it is no \emph{validating XML parser}).
If you are using this function to parse a \textsf{GAPDoc} document you can use \texttt{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree} (\ref{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree}) for some validation and additional checking of the document structure. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{StringXMLElement}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X835887057D0B4DA8}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StringXMLElement({\mdseries\slshape tree})\index{StringXMLElement@\texttt{StringXMLElement}}
\label{StringXMLElement}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a list \texttt{[string, positions]}
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} must have a format of a node in the parse tree of an XML document as returned
by \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) (including the root node representing the full document). This function
computes a pair \texttt{[string, positions]} where \texttt{string} contains XML code which is equivalent to the code which was parsed to get \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}}. And \texttt{positions} is a list of lists of four numbers \texttt{[eltb, elte, contb, conte]}. There is one such list for each XML element occuring in \texttt{string}, where \texttt{eltb} and \texttt{elte} are the begin and end position of this element in \texttt{string} and where \texttt{contb} and \texttt{conte} are begin and end position of the content of this element, or both are \texttt{0} if there is no content.
Note that parsing XML code is an irreversible task, we can only expect to get
equivalent XML code from this function. But parsing the resulting \texttt{string} again and applying \texttt{StringXMLElement} again gives the same result. See the function \texttt{EntitySubstitution} (\ref{EntitySubstitution}) for back-substitutions of entities in the result. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{EntitySubstitution}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 3 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X786827BF793191B3}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{EntitySubstitution({\mdseries\slshape xmlstring, entities})\index{EntitySubstitution@\texttt{EntitySubstitution}}
\label{EntitySubstitution}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a string
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape xmlstring}} must be a string containing XML code or a pair \texttt{[string, positions]} as returned by \texttt{StringXMLElement} (\ref{StringXMLElement}). The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape entities}} specifies entity names (without the surrounding \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape \&}} and \texttt{;}) and their substitution strings, either a list of pairs of strings or as a
record with the names as components and the substitutions as values.
This function tries to substitute non-intersecting parts of \texttt{string} by the given entities. If the \texttt{positions} information is given then only parts of the document which allow a valid
substitution by an entity are considered. Otherwise a simple text substitution
without further check is done.
Note that in general the entity resolution in XML documents is a complicated
and non-reversible task. But nevertheless this utility may be useful in not
too complicated situations. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{DisplayXMLStructure}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 4 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X86589C5C859ACE38}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{DisplayXMLStructure({\mdseries\slshape tree})\index{DisplayXMLStructure@\texttt{DisplayXMLStructure}}
\label{DisplayXMLStructure}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
This utility displays the tree structure of an XML document as it is returned
by \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) (without the \texttt{PCDATA} leaves).
Since this is usually quite long the result is shown using the \texttt{Pager} (\textbf{Reference: Pager}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{ApplyToNodesParseTree}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 5 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7A7B223A83E38B40}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ApplyToNodesParseTree({\mdseries\slshape tree, fun})\index{ApplyToNodesParseTree@\texttt{ApplyToNodesParseTree}}
\label{ApplyToNodesParseTree}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{AddRootParseTree({\mdseries\slshape tree})\index{AddRootParseTree@\texttt{AddRootParseTree}}
\label{AddRootParseTree}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{RemoveRootParseTree({\mdseries\slshape tree})\index{RemoveRootParseTree@\texttt{RemoveRootParseTree}}
\label{RemoveRootParseTree}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
The function \texttt{ApplyToNodesParseTree} applies a function \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape fun}} to all nodes of the parse tree \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} of an XML document returned by \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}).
The function \texttt{AddRootParseTree} is an application of this. It adds to all nodes a component \texttt{.root} to which the top node tree \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} is assigned. These components can be removed afterwards with \texttt{RemoveRootParseTree}. }
Here are two more utilities which use \texttt{ApplyToNodesParseTree} (\ref{ApplyToNodesParseTree}).
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{GetTextXMLTree}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 6 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7F76D4A27C7FB946}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{GetTextXMLTree({\mdseries\slshape tree})\index{GetTextXMLTree@\texttt{GetTextXMLTree}}
\label{GetTextXMLTree}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a string
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} must be a node of a parse tree of some XML document, see \texttt{ParseTreeXMLFile} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLFile}). This function collects the content of this and all included elements
recursively into a string. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{XMLElements}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 7 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X8466F74C80442F7D}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{XMLElements({\mdseries\slshape tree, eltnames})\index{XMLElements@\texttt{XMLElements}}
\label{XMLElements}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a list of nodes
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} must be a node of a parse tree of some XML document, see \texttt{ParseTreeXMLFile} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLFile}). This function returns a list of all subnodes of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} (possibly including \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}}) of elements with name given in the list of strings \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape eltnames}}. Use \texttt{"PCDATA"} as name for leave nodes which contain the actual text of the document. As an
abbreviation \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape eltnames}} can also be a string which is then put in a one element list. }
And here are utilities for processing \textsf{GAPDoc} XML documents.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 8 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X84CFF72484B19C0D}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree({\mdseries\slshape tree})\index{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree@\texttt{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree}}
\label{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} of this function is a parse tree from \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) of some \textsf{GAPDoc} document. This function does an (incomplete) validity check of the document
according to the document type declaration in \texttt{gapdoc.dtd}. It also does some additional checks which cannot be described in the DTD
(like checking whether chapters and sections have a heading). For elements
with element content the whitespace between these elements is removed.
In case of an error the break loop is entered and the position of the error in
the original XML document is printed. With \texttt{Show();} one can browse the original input in the \texttt{Pager} (\textbf{Reference: Pager}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{AddParagraphNumbersGapDocTree}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 9 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X84062CD67B286FF0}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{AddParagraphNumbersGapDocTree({\mdseries\slshape tree})\index{AddParagraphNumbersGapDocTree@\texttt{AddParagraphNumbersGapDocTree}}
\label{AddParagraphNumbersGapDocTree}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} must be an XML tree returned by \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) applied to a \textsf{GAPDoc} document. This function adds to each node of the tree a component \texttt{.count} which is of form \texttt{[Chapter[, Section[, Subsection, Paragraph] ] ]}. Here the first three numbers should be the same as produced by the {\LaTeX} version of the document. Text before the first chapter is counted as chapter \texttt{0} and similarly for sections and subsections. Some elements are always
considered to start a new paragraph. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{InfoXMLParser}}
\logpage{[ 5, 2, 10 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X78A22C58841E5D0B}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{InfoXMLParser\index{InfoXMLParser@\texttt{InfoXMLParser}}
\label{InfoXMLParser}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (info class)}}\\
The default level of this info class is 1. Functions like \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) are then printing some information, in particular in case of errors. You can
suppress it by setting the level of \texttt{InfoXMLParser} to 0. With level 2 there may be some more information for debugging purposes. }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{The Converters}}\label{Converters}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8560E1A2845EC2C1}{}
{
Here are more details about the conversion programs for \textsf{GAPDoc} XML documents.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{GAPDoc2LaTeX}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X85BE6DF178423EF5}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeX({\mdseries\slshape tree})\index{GAPDoc2LaTeX@\texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeX}}
\label{GAPDoc2LaTeX}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
{\LaTeX} document as string
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions({\mdseries\slshape [...]})\index{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions@\texttt{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions}}
\label{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
Nothing
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} for this function is a tree describing a \textsf{GAPDoc} XML document as returned by \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) (probably also checked with \texttt{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree} (\ref{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree})). The output is a string containing a version of the document which can be
written to a file and processed with {\LaTeX} or pdf{\LaTeX} (and probably Bib{\TeX} and \texttt{makeindex}).
The output uses the \texttt{report} document class and needs the following {\LaTeX} packages: \texttt{a4wide}, \texttt{amssymb}, \texttt{inputenc}, \texttt{makeidx}, \texttt{color}, \texttt{fancyvrb}, \texttt{psnfss}, \texttt{pslatex}, \texttt{enumitem} and \texttt{hyperref}. These are for example provided by the \textsf{teTeX-1.0} or \textsf{texlive} distributions of {\TeX} (which in turn are used for most {\TeX} packages of current Linux distributions); see \href{http://www.tug.org/tetex/} {\texttt{http://www.tug.org/tetex/}}.
In particular, the resulting \texttt{pdf}-output (and \texttt{dvi}-output) contains (internal and external) hyperlinks which can be very useful
for onscreen browsing of the document.
The {\LaTeX} processing also produces a file with extension \texttt{.pnr} which is \textsf{GAP} readable and contains the page numbers for all (sub)sections of the document.
This can be used by \textsf{GAP}'s online help; see \texttt{AddPageNumbersToSix} (\ref{AddPageNumbersToSix}). Non-ASCII characters in the \textsf{GAPDoc} document are translated to {\LaTeX} input in ASCII-encoding with the help of \texttt{Encode} (\ref{Encode}) and the option \texttt{"LaTeX"}. See the documentation of \texttt{Encode} (\ref{Encode}) for how to proceed if you have a character which is not handled (yet).
This function works by running recursively through the document tree and
calling a handler function for each \textsf{GAPDoc} XML element. Many of these handler functions (usually in \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeXProcs.{\textless}ElementName{\textgreater}}) are not difficult to understand (the greatest complications are some
commands for index entries, labels or the output of page number information).
So it should be easy to adjust layout details to your own taste by slight
modifications of the program.
Former versions of \textsf{GAPDoc} supported some XML processing instructions to add some extra lines to the
preamble of the {\LaTeX} document. Its use is now deprecated, use the much more flexible \texttt{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions} instead: The default layout of the resulting documents can be changed with \texttt{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions}. This changes parts of the header of the {\LaTeX} file produced by \textsf{GAPDoc}. You can see the header with some placeholders by \texttt{Page(GAPDoc2LaTeXProcs.Head);}. The placeholders are filled with components from the record \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeXProcs.DefaultOptions}. The arguments of \texttt{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions} can be records with the same structure (or parts of it) with different values.
As abbreviations there are also three strings supported as arguments. These
are \texttt{"nocolor"} for switching all colors to black; then \texttt{"nopslatex"} to use standard {\LaTeX} fonts instead of postscript fonts; and finally \texttt{"utf8"} to choose UTF-8 as input encoding for the {\LaTeX} document. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{GAPDoc2Text}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X86CD0B197CD58D2A}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{GAPDoc2Text({\mdseries\slshape tree[, bibpath][, width]})\index{GAPDoc2Text@\texttt{GAPDoc2Text}}
\label{GAPDoc2Text}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
record containing text files as strings and other information
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} for this function is a tree describing a \textsf{GAPDoc} XML document as returned by \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) (probably also checked with \texttt{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree} (\ref{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree})). This function produces a text version of the document which can be used
with \textsf{GAP}'s online help (with the \texttt{"screen"} viewer, see \texttt{SetHelpViewer} (\textbf{Reference: SetHelpViewer})). It includes title page, bibliography and index. The bibliography is made
from BibXMLext or Bib{\TeX} databases, see \ref{ch:bibutil}. Their location must be given with the argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bibpath}} (as string or directory object).
The output is a record with one component for each chapter (with names \texttt{"0"}, \texttt{"1"}, ..., \texttt{"Bib"} and \texttt{"Ind"}). Each such component is again a record with the following components:
\begin{description}
\item[{\texttt{text}}] the text of the whole chapter as a string
\item[{\texttt{ssnr}}] list of subsection numbers in this chapter (like \texttt{[3, 2, 1]} for chapter{\nobreakspace}3, section{\nobreakspace}2,
subsection{\nobreakspace}1)
\item[{\texttt{linenr}}] corresponding list of line numbers where the subsections start
\item[{\texttt{len}}] number of lines of this chapter
\end{description}
The result can be written into files with the command \texttt{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles} (\ref{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles}).
As a side effect this function also produces the \texttt{manual.six} information which is used for searching in \textsf{GAP}'s online help. This is stored in \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}}.six} and can be printed into a \texttt{manual.six} file with \texttt{PrintSixFile} (\ref{PrintSixFile}) (preferably after producing a {\LaTeX} version of the document as well and adding the page number information to \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}}.six}, see \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeX} (\ref{GAPDoc2LaTeX}) and \texttt{AddPageNumbersToSix} (\ref{AddPageNumbersToSix})).
The text produced by this function contains some markup via ANSI escape
sequences. The sequences used here are usually ignored by terminals. But the \textsf{GAP} help system will substitute them by interpreted color and attribute sequences
(see \texttt{TextAttr} (\ref{TextAttr})) before displaying them. There is a default markup used for this but it can
also be configured by the user, see \texttt{SetGAPDocTextTheme} (\ref{SetGAPDocTextTheme}). Furthermore, the text produced is in UTF-8 encoding. The encoding is also
translated on the fly, if \texttt{GAPInfo.TermEncoding} is set to some encoding supported by \texttt{Encode} (\ref{Encode}), e.g., \texttt{"ISO-8859-1"} or \texttt{"latin1"}.
With the optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape width}} a different length of the output text lines can be chosen. The default is 76
and all lines in the resulting text start with two spaces. This looks good on
a terminal with a standard width of 80 characters and you probably don't want
to use this argument. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 3 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7DFCE7357D6032A2}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles({\mdseries\slshape t[, path]})\index{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles@\texttt{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles}}
\label{GAPDoc2TextPrintTextFiles}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
The first argument must be a result returned by \texttt{GAPDoc2Text} (\ref{GAPDoc2Text}). The second argument is a path for the files to write, it can be given as
string or directory object. The text of each chapter is written into a
separate file with name \texttt{chap0.txt}, \texttt{chap1.txt}, ..., \texttt{chapBib.txt}, and \texttt{chapInd.txt}.
If you want to make your document accessible via the \textsf{GAP} online help you must put at least these files for the text version into a
directory, together with the file \texttt{manual.six}, see \texttt{PrintSixFile} (\ref{PrintSixFile}). Then specify the path to the \texttt{manual.six} file in the packages \texttt{PackageInfo.g} file, see (\textbf{Reference: The PackageInfo.g File}).
Optionally you can add the \texttt{dvi}- and \texttt{pdf}-versions of the document which are produced with \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeX} (\ref{GAPDoc2LaTeX}) to this directory. The files must have the names \texttt{manual.dvi} and \texttt{manual.pdf}, respectively. Also you can add the files of the HTML version produced with \texttt{GAPDoc2HTML} (\ref{GAPDoc2HTML}) to this directory, see \texttt{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles} (\ref{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles}). The handler functions in \textsf{GAP} for this help format detect automatically which of the optional formats of a
book are actually available. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{AddPageNumbersToSix}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 4 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7EB5E86F87A09F94}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{AddPageNumbersToSix({\mdseries\slshape tree, pnrfile})\index{AddPageNumbersToSix@\texttt{AddPageNumbersToSix}}
\label{AddPageNumbersToSix}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
Here \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} must be the XML tree of a \textsf{GAPDoc} document, returned by \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}). Running \texttt{latex} on the result of \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeX(\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}})} produces a file \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape pnrfile}} (with extension \texttt{.pnr}). The command \texttt{GAPDoc2Text(\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}})} creates a component \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}}.six} which contains all information about the document for the \textsf{GAP} online help, except the page numbers in the \texttt{.dvi, .ps, .pdf} versions of the document. This command adds the missing page number
information to \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}}.six}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{PrintSixFile}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 5 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7D42CFED7885BC00}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{PrintSixFile({\mdseries\slshape tree, bookname, fname})\index{PrintSixFile@\texttt{PrintSixFile}}
\label{PrintSixFile}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
This function prints the \texttt{.six} file \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape fname}} for a \textsf{GAPDoc} document stored in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} with name \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bookname}}. Such a file contains all information about the book which is needed by the \textsf{GAP} online help. This information must first be created by calls of \texttt{GAPDoc2Text} (\ref{GAPDoc2Text}) and \texttt{AddPageNumbersToSix} (\ref{AddPageNumbersToSix}). }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{SetGAPDocTextTheme}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 6 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7DEB37417BBD8941}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SetGAPDocTextTheme({\mdseries\slshape [optrec1[, optrec2], ...]})\index{SetGAPDocTextTheme@\texttt{SetGAPDocTextTheme}}
\label{SetGAPDocTextTheme}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
This utility function is for readers of the screen version of \textsf{GAP} manuals which are generated by the \textsf{GAPDoc} package. It allows to configure the color and attribute layout of the
displayed text. There is a default which can be reset by calling this function
without argument.
As an abbreviation the arguments \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape optrec1}} and so on can be strings for the known name of a theme. Information about
valid names is shown with \texttt{SetGAPDocTextTheme("");}.
Otherwise, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape optrec1}} and so on must be a record. Its entries overwrite the corresponding entries in
the default and in previous arguments. To construct valid markup you can use \texttt{TextAttr} (\ref{TextAttr}). Entries must be either pairs of strings, which are put before and after the
corresponding text, or as an abbreviation it can be a single string. In the
latter case, the second string is implied; if the string contains an escape
sequence the second string is \texttt{TextAttr.reset}, otherwise the given string is used. The following components are recognized:
\begin{description}
\item[{\texttt{flush}}] \texttt{"both"} for left-right justified paragraphs, and \texttt{"left"} for ragged right ones
\item[{\texttt{Heading}}] chapter and (sub-)section headings
\item[{\texttt{Func}}] function, operation, ... names
\item[{\texttt{Arg}}] argument names in descriptions
\item[{\texttt{Example}}] example code
\item[{\texttt{Package}}] package names
\item[{\texttt{Returns}}] Returns-line in descriptions
\item[{\texttt{URL}}] URLs
\item[{\texttt{Mark}}] Marks in description lists
\item[{\texttt{K}}] \textsf{GAP} keywords
\item[{\texttt{C}}] code or text to type
\item[{\texttt{F}}] file names
\item[{\texttt{B}}] buttons
\item[{\texttt{M}}] simplified math elements
\item[{\texttt{Math}}] normal math elements
\item[{\texttt{Display}}] displayed math elements
\item[{\texttt{Emph}}] emphasized text
\item[{\texttt{Q}}] quoted text
\item[{\texttt{Ref}}] reference text
\item[{\texttt{Prompt}}] \textsf{GAP} prompt in examples
\item[{\texttt{BrkPrompt}}] \textsf{GAP} break prompt in examples
\item[{\texttt{GAPInput}}] \textsf{GAP} input in examples
\item[{\texttt{reset}}] reset to default, don't change this
\item[{\texttt{BibAuthor}}] author names in bibliography
\item[{\texttt{BibTitle}}] titles in bibliography
\item[{\texttt{BibJournal}}] journal names in bibliography
\item[{\texttt{BibVolume}}] volume number in bibliography
\item[{\texttt{BibLabel}}] labels for bibliography entries
\item[{\texttt{BibReset}}] reset for bibliography, don't change
\item[{\texttt{ListBullet}}] bullet for simple lists (2 visible characters long)
\item[{\texttt{EnumMarks}}] one visible character before and after the number in enumerated lists
\item[{\texttt{DefLineMarker}}] marker before function and variable definitions (2 visible characters long)
\item[{\texttt{FillString}}] for filling in definitions and example separator lines
\end{description}
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@# use no colors for GAP examples and |
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@# change display of headings to bold green|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@SetGAPDocTextTheme("noColorPrompt", |
!gapprompt@>| !gapinput@ rec(Heading:=Concatenation(TextAttr.bold, TextAttr.2)));|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{GAPDoc2HTML}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 7 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X84F22EEB78845CFD}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{GAPDoc2HTML({\mdseries\slshape tree[, bibpath[, gaproot]][, mtrans]})\index{GAPDoc2HTML@\texttt{GAPDoc2HTML}}
\label{GAPDoc2HTML}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
record containing HTML files as strings and other information
\index{MathJax@\textsf{MathJax}} The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} for this function is a tree describing a \textsf{GAPDoc} XML document as returned by \texttt{ParseTreeXMLString} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLString}) (probably also checked with \texttt{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree} (\ref{CheckAndCleanGapDocTree})). Without an \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape mtrans}} argument this function produces an HTML version of the document which can be
read with any Web-browser and also be used with \textsf{GAP}'s online help (see \texttt{SetHelpViewer} (\textbf{Reference: SetHelpViewer})). It includes title page, bibliography, and index. The bibliography is made
from Bib{\TeX} databases. Their location must be given with the argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bibpath}} (as string or directory object, if not given the current directory is used).
If the third argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape gaproot}} is given and is a string then this string is interpreted as relative path to \textsf{GAP}'s main root directory. Reference-URLs to external HTML-books which begin with
the \textsf{GAP} root path are then rewritten to start with the given relative path. This makes
the HTML-documentation portable provided a package is installed in some
standard location below the \textsf{GAP} root.
The output is a record with one component for each chapter (with names \texttt{"0"}, \texttt{"1"}, ..., \texttt{"Bib"}, and \texttt{"Ind"}). Each such component is again a record with the following components:
\begin{description}
\item[{\texttt{text}}] the text of an HTML file containing the whole chapter (as a string)
\item[{\texttt{ssnr}}] list of subsection numbers in this chapter (like \texttt{[3, 2, 1]} for chapter{\nobreakspace}3, section{\nobreakspace}2,
subsection{\nobreakspace}1)
\end{description}
\emph{Standard output format without} \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape mtrans}} \emph{argument}
The HTML code produced with this converter conforms to the W3C specification ``XHTML 1.0 strict'', see \href{http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1} {\texttt{http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1}}. First, this means that the HTML files are valid XML files. Secondly, the
extension ``strict'' says in particular that the code doesn't contain any explicit font or color
information.
Mathematical formulae are handled as in the text converter \texttt{GAPDoc2Text} (\ref{GAPDoc2Text}). We don't want to assume that the browser can use symbol fonts. Some \textsf{GAP} users like to browse the online help with \texttt{lynx}, see \texttt{SetHelpViewer} (\textbf{Reference: SetHelpViewer}), which runs inside the same terminal windows as \textsf{GAP}.
To view the generated files in graphical browsers, stylesheet files with
layout configuration should be copied into the directory with the generated
HTML files, see \ref{StyleSheets}.
\label{mtransarg} \emph{Output format with} \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape mtrans}} argument
Currently, there are three variants of this converter available which handle
mathematical formulae differently. They are accessed via the optional last \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape mtrans}} argument.
If \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape mtrans}} is set to \texttt{"MathJax"} the formulae are essentially translated as for {\LaTeX} documents (there is no processing of \texttt{{\textless}M{\textgreater}} elements as decribed in \ref{M}). Inline formulae are delimited by \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}(} and \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}})} and displayed formulae by \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}[} and \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}]}. With \textsf{MathJax} webpages can contain nicely formatted scalable and searchable formulae. The
resulting files link by default to \href{http://cdn.mathjax.org} {http://cdn.mathjax.org} to get the \textsf{MathJax} script and fonts. This means that they can only be used on computers with
internet access. An alternative URL can be set by overwriting \texttt{GAPDoc2HTMLProcs.MathJaxURL} before building the HTML version of a manual. This way a local installation of \textsf{MathJax} could be used. See \href{http://www.mathjax.org/} {http://www.mathjax.org/} for more details.
The following possibilities for \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape mtrans}} are still supported, but since the \textsf{MathJax} approach seems much better, their use is deprecated.
If the argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape mtrans}} is set to \texttt{"Tth"} it is assumed that you have installed the {\LaTeX} to HTML translation program \texttt{tth}. This is used to translate the contents of the \texttt{M}, \texttt{Math} and \texttt{Display} elements into HTML code. Note that the resulting code is not compliant with
any standard. Formally it is ``XHTML 1.0 Transitional'', it contains explicit font specifications and the characters of mathematical
symbols are included via their position in a ``Symbol'' font. Some graphical browsers can be configured to display this in a useful
manner, check \href{http://hutchinson.belmont.ma.us/tth/} {the Tth homepage} for more details.
If the \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape mtrans}} argument is set to \texttt{"MathML"} it is assumed that you have installed the translation program \texttt{ttm}, see also \href{http://hutchinson.belmont.ma.us/tth/} {the Tth homepage}). This is used to translate the contents of the \texttt{M}, \texttt{Math} and \texttt{Display} elements to MathML 2.0 markup. The resulting files should conform to the
"XHTML 1.1 plus MathML 2.0" standard, see \href{http://www.w3.org/TR/MathML2/} {the W3C information} for more details. It is expected that the next generation of graphical
browsers will be able to render such files (try for example \texttt{Mozilla}, at least 0.9.9). You must copy the \texttt{.xsl} and \texttt{.css} files from \textsf{GAPDoc}s \texttt{mathml} directory to the directory containing the output files. The translation with \texttt{ttm} is still experimental. The output of this converter variant is garbage for
browsers which don't support MathML.
This function works by running recursively through the document tree and
calling a handler function for each \textsf{GAPDoc} XML element. Many of these handler functions (usually in \texttt{GAPDoc2TextProcs.{\textless}ElementName{\textgreater}}) are not difficult to understand (the greatest complications are some
commands for index entries, labels or the output of page number information).
So it should be easy to adjust certain details to your own taste by slight
modifications of the program.
The result of this converter can be written to files with the command \texttt{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles} (\ref{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles}).
There are two user preferences for reading the HTML manuals produced by \textsf{GAPDoc}. A user can choose among several style files which determine the appearance
of the manual pages with \texttt{SetUserPreference("GAPDoc", "HTMLStyle", [...]);} where the list in the third argument are arguments for \texttt{SetGAPDocHTMLStyle} (\ref{SetGAPDocHTMLStyle}). The second preference is set by \texttt{SetUserPreference("GAPDoc", "UseMathJax", ...);} where the third argument is \texttt{true} or \texttt{false} (default). If this is set to \texttt{true}, the \textsf{GAP} help system displays the \textsf{MathJax} version of the HTML manuals. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 8 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X84A7007778073E7A}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles({\mdseries\slshape t[, path]})\index{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles@\texttt{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles}}
\label{GAPDoc2HTMLPrintHTMLFiles}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
The first argument must be a result returned by \texttt{GAPDoc2HTML} (\ref{GAPDoc2HTML}). The second argument is a path for the files to write, it can be given as
string or directory object. The text of each chapter is written into a
separate file with name \texttt{chap0.html}, \texttt{chap1.html}, ..., \texttt{chapBib.html}, and \texttt{chapInd.html}.
The \textsf{MathJax} versions are written to files \texttt{chap0{\textunderscore}mj.html}, ..., \texttt{chapInd{\textunderscore}mj.html}.
The experimental versions which are produced with \texttt{tth} or \texttt{ttm} use different names for the files, namely \texttt{chap0{\textunderscore}sym.html}, and so on for files which need symbol fonts and \texttt{chap0{\textunderscore}mml.xml} for files with MathML translations.
You should also add stylesheet files to the directory with the HTML files, see \ref{StyleSheets}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Stylesheet files}}\label{StyleSheets}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 9 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X788AB14383272FDB}{}
{
\index{CSS stylesheets} For graphical browsers the layout of the generated HTML manuals can be highly
configured by cascading stylesheet (CSS) and javascript files. Such files are
provided in the \texttt{styles} directory of the \textsf{GAPDoc} package.
We recommend that these files are copied into each manual directory (such that
each of them is selfcontained). There is a utility function \texttt{CopyHTMLStyleFiles} (\ref{CopyHTMLStyleFiles}) which does this. Of course, these files may be changed or new styles may be
added. New styles may also be sent to the \textsf{GAPDoc} authors for possible inclusion in future versions.
The generated HTML files refer to the file \texttt{manual.css} which conforms to the W3C specification CSS 2.0, see \href{http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-CSS2} {\texttt{http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-CSS2}}, and the javascript file \texttt{manual.js} (only in browsers which support CSS or javascript, respectively; but the HTML
files are also readable without any of them). To add a style \texttt{mystyle} one or both of \texttt{mystyle.css} and \texttt{mystyle.js} must be provided; these can overwrite default settings and add new javascript
functions. For more details see the comments in \texttt{manual.js}.
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{CopyHTMLStyleFiles}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 10 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X813599E982DE9B98}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{CopyHTMLStyleFiles({\mdseries\slshape dir})\index{CopyHTMLStyleFiles@\texttt{CopyHTMLStyleFiles}}
\label{CopyHTMLStyleFiles}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
This utility function copies the \texttt{*.css} and \texttt{*.js} files from the \texttt{styles} directory of the \textsf{GAPDoc} package into the directory \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape dir}}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{SetGAPDocHTMLStyle}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 11 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X85AFD98383174BB5}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SetGAPDocHTMLStyle({\mdseries\slshape [style1[, style2], ...]})\index{SetGAPDocHTMLStyle@\texttt{SetGAPDocHTMLStyle}}
\label{SetGAPDocHTMLStyle}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
This utility function is for readers of the HTML version of \textsf{GAP} manuals which are generated by the \textsf{GAPDoc} package. It allows to configure the display style of the manuals. This will
only have an effect if you are using a browser that supports \textsf{javascript}. There is a default which can be reset by calling this function without
argument.
The arguments \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape style1}} and so on must be strings. You can find out about the valid strings by
following the \textsc{[Style]} link on top of any manual page. (Going back to the original page, its address
has a setting for \texttt{GAPDocStyle} which is the list of strings, separated by commas, you want to use here.)
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@# show/hide subsections in tables on contents only after click,|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@# and don't use colors in GAP examples|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@SetGAPDocHTMLStyle("toggless", "nocolorprompt");|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{InfoGAPDoc}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 12 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X864A528B81C661A2}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{InfoGAPDoc\index{InfoGAPDoc@\texttt{InfoGAPDoc}}
\label{InfoGAPDoc}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (info class)}}\\
The default level of this info class is 1. The converter functions for \textsf{GAPDoc} documents are then printing some information. You can suppress this by setting
the level of \texttt{InfoGAPDoc} to 0. With level 2 there may be some more information for debugging purposes. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{SetGapDocLanguage}}
\logpage{[ 5, 3, 13 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X82AB468887ED0DBB}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SetGapDocLanguage({\mdseries\slshape [lang]})\index{SetGapDocLanguage@\texttt{SetGapDocLanguage}}
\label{SetGapDocLanguage}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
\index{Using \textsf{GAPDoc} with other languages} The \textsf{GAPDoc} converter programs sometimes produce text which is not explicit in the
document, e.g., headers like ``Abstract'', ``Appendix'', links to ``Next Chapter'', variable types ``function'' and so on.
With \texttt{SetGapDocLanguage} the language for these texts can be changed. The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape lang}} must be a string. Calling without argument or with a language name for which
no translations are available is the same as using the default \texttt{"english"}.
If your language \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape lang}} is not yet available, look at the record \texttt{GAPDocTexts.english} and translate all the strings to \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape lang}}. Then assign this record to \texttt{GAPDocTexts.(\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape lang}})} and send it to the \textsf{GAPDoc} authors for inclusion in future versions of \textsf{GAPDoc}. (Currently, there are translations for \texttt{english}, \texttt{german}, \texttt{russian} and \texttt{ukrainian}.)
\emph{Further hints:} To get strings produced by {\LaTeX} right you will probably use the \texttt{babel} package with option \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape lang}}, see the information on \texttt{ExtraPreamble} in \texttt{GAPDoc2LaTeX} (\ref{GAPDoc2LaTeX}). If \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape lang}} cannot be encoded in \texttt{latin1} encoding you can consider the use of \texttt{"utf8"} with \texttt{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions} (\ref{SetGapDocLaTeXOptions}). }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Testing Manual Examples}}\label{Sec:TestExample}
\logpage{[ 5, 4, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X800299827B88ABBE}{}
{
\index{\texttt{ManualExamples}} \index{\texttt{TestManualExamples}} We also provide some tools to check and adjust the examples given in \texttt{{\textless}Example{\textgreater}}-elements.
Former versions of \textsf{GAPDoc} provided functions \texttt{ManualExamples} and \texttt{TestManualExamples}. These functions are still available, but no longer documented. Their use is
deprecated.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{ExtractExamples}}
\logpage{[ 5, 4, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X8337B2BC79253B3F}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ExtractExamples({\mdseries\slshape path, main, files, units})\index{ExtractExamples@\texttt{ExtractExamples}}
\label{ExtractExamples}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a list of lists
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ExtractExamplesXMLTree({\mdseries\slshape tree, units})\index{ExtractExamplesXMLTree@\texttt{ExtractExamplesXMLTree}}
\label{ExtractExamplesXMLTree}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a list of lists
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape tree}} must be a parse tree of a \textsf{GAPDoc} document, see \texttt{ParseTreeXMLFile} (\ref{ParseTreeXMLFile}). The function \texttt{ExtractExamplesXMLTree} returns a data structure representing the \texttt{{\textless}Example{\textgreater}} elements of the document. The return value can be used with \texttt{RunExamples} (\ref{RunExamples}) to check and optionally update the examples of the document.
Depending on the argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape units}} several examples are collected in one list. Recognized values for \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape units}} are \texttt{"Chapter"}, \texttt{"Section"}, \texttt{"Subsection"} or \texttt{"Single"}. The latter means that each example is in a separate list. For all other
value of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape units}} just one list with all examples is returned.
The arguments \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape path}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape main}} and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape files}} of \texttt{ExtractExamples} are the same as for \texttt{ComposedDocument} (\ref{ComposedDocument}). This function first contructs and parses the \textsf{GAPDoc} document and then applies \texttt{ExtractExamplesXMLTree}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{RunExamples}}
\logpage{[ 5, 4, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X781D56FC7B938DCB}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{RunExamples({\mdseries\slshape exmpls[, optrec]})\index{RunExamples@\texttt{RunExamples}}
\label{RunExamples}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape exmpls}} must be the output of a call to \texttt{ExtractExamples} (\ref{ExtractExamples}) or \texttt{ExtractExamplesXMLTree} (\ref{ExtractExamplesXMLTree}). The optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape optrec}} must be a record, its components can change the default behaviour of this
function.
By default this function runs the \textsf{GAP} input of all examples and compares the actual output with the output given in
the examples. If differences occur these are displayed together with
information on the location of the source code of that example. Before running
the examples in each unit (entry of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape exmpls}}) the function \texttt{START{\textunderscore}TEST} (\textbf{Reference: START{\textunderscore}TEST}) is called and the screen width is set to 72 characters.
If the argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape optrec}} is given, the following components are recognized:
\begin{description}
\item[{\texttt{showDiffs}}] The default value is \texttt{true}, if set to something else found differences in the examples are not
displayed.
\item[{\texttt{width}}] The value must be a positive integer which is used as screen width when
running the examples. As mentioned above, the default is 72 which is a
sensible value for the text version of the \textsf{GAPDoc} document used in a 80 character wide terminal.
\item[{\texttt{changeSources}}] If this is set to \texttt{true} then the source code of all manual examples which show differences is adjusted
to the current outputs. The default is \texttt{false}.\\
Use this feature with care. Note that sometimes differences can indicate a
bug, and in such a case it is more appropriate to fix the bug instead of
changing the example output.
\item[{\texttt{compareFunction}}] The function used to compare the output shown in the example and the current
output. See \texttt{Test} (\textbf{Reference: Test}) for more details.
\item[{\texttt{checkWidth}}] If this option is a positive integer \texttt{n} the function prints warnings if an example contains any line with more than \texttt{n} characters (input and output lines are considered). By default this option is
set to \texttt{false}.
\end{description}
}
}
}
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{String and Text Utilities}}\label{ch:util}
\logpage{[ 6, 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X86CEF540862EE042}{}
{
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Text Utilities}}\label{TextUtil}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X847DA07C7C46B38A}{}
{
This section describes some utility functions for handling texts within \textsf{GAP}. They are used by the functions in the \textsf{GAPDoc} package but may be useful for other purposes as well. We start with some
variables containing useful strings and go on with functions for parsing and
reformatting text.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{WHITESPACE}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X786D477C7AB636AA}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{WHITESPACE\index{WHITESPACE@\texttt{WHITESPACE}}
\label{WHITESPACE}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{CAPITALLETTERS\index{CAPITALLETTERS@\texttt{CAPITALLETTERS}}
\label{CAPITALLETTERS}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SMALLLETTERS\index{SMALLLETTERS@\texttt{SMALLLETTERS}}
\label{SMALLLETTERS}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{LETTERS\index{LETTERS@\texttt{LETTERS}}
\label{LETTERS}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{DIGITS\index{DIGITS@\texttt{DIGITS}}
\label{DIGITS}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{HEXDIGITS\index{HEXDIGITS@\texttt{HEXDIGITS}}
\label{HEXDIGITS}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{BOXCHARS\index{BOXCHARS@\texttt{BOXCHARS}}
\label{BOXCHARS}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
These variables contain sets of characters which are useful for text
processing. They are defined as follows.
\begin{description}
\item[{\texttt{WHITESPACE}}] \texttt{" \texttt{\symbol{92}}n\texttt{\symbol{92}}t\texttt{\symbol{92}}r"}
\item[{\texttt{CAPITALLETTERS}}] \texttt{"ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ"}
\item[{\texttt{SMALLLETTERS}}] \texttt{"abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz"}
\item[{\texttt{LETTERS}}] concatenation of \texttt{CAPITALLETTERS} and \texttt{SMALLLETTERS}
\item[{\texttt{DIGITS}}] \texttt{"0123456789"}
\item[{\texttt{HEXDIGITS}}] \texttt{"0123456789ABCDEFabcdef"}
\item[{\texttt{BOXCHARS}}] \texttt{Encode(Unicode(9472 + [ 0, 2, 12, 44, 16, 28, 60, 36, 20, 52, 24, 1, 3, 15,
51, 19, 35, 75, 43, 23, 59, 27, 80, 81, 84, 102, 87, 96, 108, 99, 90, 105, 93
]), "UTF-8")}, these are in UTF-8 encoding, the \texttt{i}-th unicode character is \texttt{BOXCHARS\texttt{\symbol{123}}[3*i-2..3*i]\texttt{\symbol{125}}}.
\end{description}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{TextAttr}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X785F61E77899580E}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{TextAttr\index{TextAttr@\texttt{TextAttr}}
\label{TextAttr}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
The record \texttt{TextAttr} contains strings which can be printed to change the terminal attribute for the
following characters. This only works with terminals which understand basic
ANSI escape sequences. Try the following example to see if this is the case
for the terminal you are using. It shows the effect of the foreground and
background color attributes and of the \texttt{.bold}, \texttt{.blink}, \texttt{.normal}, \texttt{.reverse} and \texttt{.underscore} which can partly be mixed.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
extra := ["CSI", "reset", "delline", "home"];;
for t in Difference(RecNames(TextAttr), extra) do
Print(TextAttr.(t), "TextAttr.", t, TextAttr.reset,"\n");
od;
\end{Verbatim}
The suggested defaults for colors \texttt{0..7} are black, red, green, brown, blue, magenta, cyan, white. But this may be
different for your terminal configuration.
The escape sequence \texttt{.delline} deletes the content of the current line and \texttt{.home} moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
for i in [1..5] do
Print(TextAttr.home, TextAttr.delline, String(i,-6), "\c");
Sleep(1);
od;
\end{Verbatim}
\index{UseColorsInTerminal} Whenever you use this in some printing routines you should make it optional.
Use these attributes only when \texttt{UserPreference("UseColorsInTerminal");} returns \texttt{true}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{WrapTextAttribute}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 3 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7B8AD7517E5FD0EA}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{WrapTextAttribute({\mdseries\slshape str, attr})\index{WrapTextAttribute@\texttt{WrapTextAttribute}}
\label{WrapTextAttribute}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a string with markup
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} must be a text as \textsf{GAP} string, possibly with markup by escape sequences as in \texttt{TextAttr} (\ref{TextAttr}). This function returns a string which is wrapped by the escape sequences \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape attr}} and \texttt{TextAttr.reset}. It takes care of markup in the given string by appending \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape attr}} also after each given \texttt{TextAttr.reset} in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@str := Concatenation("XXX",TextAttr.2, "BLUB", TextAttr.reset,"YYY");|
"XXX\033[32mBLUB\033[0mYYY"
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@str2 := WrapTextAttribute(str, TextAttr.1);|
"\033[31mXXX\033[32mBLUB\033[0m\033[31m\027YYY\033[0m"
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@str3 := WrapTextAttribute(str, TextAttr.underscore);|
"\033[4mXXX\033[32mBLUB\033[0m\033[4m\027YYY\033[0m"
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@# use Print(str); and so on to see how it looks like.|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{FormatParagraph}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 4 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X812058CE7C8E9022}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{FormatParagraph({\mdseries\slshape str[, len][, flush][, attr][, widthfun]})\index{FormatParagraph@\texttt{FormatParagraph}}
\label{FormatParagraph}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
the formatted paragraph as string
This function formats a text given in the string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} as a paragraph. The optional arguments have the following meaning:
\begin{description}
\item[{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape len}}}] the length of the lines of the formatted text, default is \texttt{78} (counted without a visible length of the strings specified in the \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape attr}} argument)
\item[{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape flush}}}] can be \texttt{"left"}, \texttt{"right"}, \texttt{"center"} or \texttt{"both"}, telling that lines should be flushed left, flushed right, centered or
left-right justified, respectively, default is \texttt{"both"}
\item[{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape attr}}}] is a list of two strings; the first is prepended and the second appended to
each line of the result (can for example be used for indenting, \texttt{[" ", ""]}, or some markup, \texttt{[TextAttr.bold, TextAttr.reset]}, default is \texttt{["", ""]})
\item[{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape widthfun}}}] must be a function which returns the display width of text in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}. The default is \texttt{Length} assuming that each byte corresponds to a character of width one. If \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} is given in \texttt{UTF-8} encoding one can use \texttt{WidthUTF8String} (\ref{WidthUTF8String}) here.
\end{description}
This function tries to handle markup with the escape sequences explained in \texttt{TextAttr} (\ref{TextAttr}) correctly.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@str := "One two three four five six seven eight nine ten eleven.";;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(FormatParagraph(str, 25, "left", ["/* ", " */"])); |
/* One two three four five */
/* six seven eight nine ten */
/* eleven. */
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{SubstitutionSublist}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 5 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X82A9121678923445}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SubstitutionSublist({\mdseries\slshape list, sublist, new[, flag]})\index{SubstitutionSublist@\texttt{SubstitutionSublist}}
\label{SubstitutionSublist}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
the changed list
This function looks for (non-overlapping) occurrences of a sublist \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape sublist}} in a list \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape list}} (compare \texttt{PositionSublist} (\textbf{Reference: PositionSublist})) and returns a list where these are substituted with the list \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape new}}.
The optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape flag}} can either be \texttt{"all"} (this is the default if not given) or \texttt{"one"}. In the second case only the first occurrence of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape sublist}} is substituted.
If \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape sublist}} does not occur in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape list}} then \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape list}} itself is returned (and not a \texttt{ShallowCopy(list)}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@SubstitutionSublist("xababx", "ab", "a");|
"xaax"
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{StripBeginEnd}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 6 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X83DE31017B557136}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StripBeginEnd({\mdseries\slshape list, strip})\index{StripBeginEnd@\texttt{StripBeginEnd}}
\label{StripBeginEnd}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
changed string
Here \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape list}} and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape strip}} must be lists. This function returns the sublist of list which does not
contain the leading and trailing entries which are entries of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape strip}}. If the result is equal to \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape list}} then \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape list}} itself is returned.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@StripBeginEnd(" ,a, b,c, ", ", ");|
"a, b,c"
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{StripEscapeSequences}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 7 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7A5978CF84C3C2D3}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StripEscapeSequences({\mdseries\slshape str})\index{StripEscapeSequences@\texttt{StripEscapeSequences}}
\label{StripEscapeSequences}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
string without escape sequences
This function returns the string one gets from the string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} by removing all escape sequences which are explained in \texttt{TextAttr} (\ref{TextAttr}). If \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} does not contain such a sequence then \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} itself is returned. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{RepeatedString}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 8 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7D71CB837EE969D4}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{RepeatedString({\mdseries\slshape c, len})\index{RepeatedString@\texttt{RepeatedString}}
\label{RepeatedString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{RepeatedUTF8String({\mdseries\slshape c, len})\index{RepeatedUTF8String@\texttt{RepeatedUTF8String}}
\label{RepeatedUTF8String}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
Here \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape c}} must be either a character or a string and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape len}} is a non-negative number. Then \texttt{RepeatedString} returns a string of length \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape len}} consisting of copies of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape c}}.
In the variant \texttt{RepeatedUTF8String} the argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape c}} is considered as string in UTF-8 encoding, and it can also be specified as
unicode string or character, see \texttt{Unicode} (\ref{Unicode}). The result is a string in UTF-8 encoding which has visible width \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape len}} as explained in \texttt{WidthUTF8String} (\ref{WidthUTF8String}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@RepeatedString('=',51);|
"==================================================="
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@RepeatedString("*=",51);|
"*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*=*"
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@s := "bh";;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@enc := GAPInfo.TermEncoding;;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@if enc <> "UTF-8" then s := Encode(Unicode(s, enc), "UTF-8"); fi;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@l := RepeatedUTF8String(s, 8);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@u := Unicode(l, "UTF-8");;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(Encode(u, enc), "\n");|
bhbhb
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{NumberDigits}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 9 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7CEEA5B57D7BB38F}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{NumberDigits({\mdseries\slshape str, base})\index{NumberDigits@\texttt{NumberDigits}}
\label{NumberDigits}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
integer
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{DigitsNumber({\mdseries\slshape n, base})\index{DigitsNumber@\texttt{DigitsNumber}}
\label{DigitsNumber}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
string
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} of \texttt{NumberDigits} must be a string consisting only of an optional leading \texttt{'-'} and characters in \texttt{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}, describing an integer in base \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape base}} with $2 \leq \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape base}} \leq 16$. This function returns the corresponding integer.
The function \texttt{DigitsNumber} does the reverse.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@NumberDigits("1A3F",16);|
6719
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@DigitsNumber(6719, 16);|
"1A3F"
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{PositionMatchingDelimiter}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 10 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7AF694D9839BF65C}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{PositionMatchingDelimiter({\mdseries\slshape str, delim, pos})\index{PositionMatchingDelimiter@\texttt{PositionMatchingDelimiter}}
\label{PositionMatchingDelimiter}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
position as integer or \texttt{fail}
Here \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} must be a string and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape delim}} a string with two different characters. This function searches the smallest
position \texttt{r} of the character \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape delim}}[2]} in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} such that the number of occurrences of \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape delim}}[2]} in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} between positions \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape pos}}+1} and \texttt{r} is by one greater than the corresponding number of occurrences of \texttt{\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape delim}}[1]}.
If such an \texttt{r} exists, it is returned. Otherwise \texttt{fail} is returned.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@PositionMatchingDelimiter("{}x{ab{c}d}", "{}", 0);|
fail
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@PositionMatchingDelimiter("{}x{ab{c}d}", "{}", 1);|
2
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@PositionMatchingDelimiter("{}x{ab{c}d}", "{}", 6);|
11
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{WordsString}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 11 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X832556617F10AAA8}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{WordsString({\mdseries\slshape str})\index{WordsString@\texttt{WordsString}}
\label{WordsString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
list of strings containing the words
This returns the list of words of a text stored in the string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}. All non-letters are considered as word boundaries and are removed.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=@|A,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
@gapprompt|gap>A @gapinput|WordsString("one_two \n three!?");A
[ "one", "two", "three" ]
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Base64String}}
\logpage{[ 6, 1, 12 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X83F2821783DA9826}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{Base64String({\mdseries\slshape str})\index{Base64String@\texttt{Base64String}}
\label{Base64String}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StringBase64({\mdseries\slshape bstr})\index{StringBase64@\texttt{StringBase64}}
\label{StringBase64}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a string
The first function translates arbitrary binary data given as a GAP string into
a \emph{base 64} encoded string. This encoded string contains only printable ASCII characters
and is used in various data transfer protocols (\texttt{MIME} encoded emails, weak password encryption, ...). We use the specification in \href{http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc2045} {RFCÂ 2045}.
The second function has the reverse functionality. Here we also accept the
characters \texttt{-{\textunderscore}} instead of \texttt{+/} as last two characters. Whitespace is ignored.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=@|D,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
@gapprompt|gap>D @gapinput|b := Base64String("This is a secret!");D
"VGhpcyBpcyBhIHNlY3JldCEA="
@gapprompt|gap>D @gapinput|StringBase64(b); D
"This is a secret!"
\end{Verbatim}
}
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Unicode Strings}}\label{sec:Unicode}
\logpage{[ 6, 2, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8489C67D80399814}{}
{
The \textsf{GAPDoc} package provides some tools to deal with unicode characters and strings. These
can be used for recoding text strings between various encodings.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Unicode Strings and Characters}}\logpage{[ 6, 2, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X8475671278948DDD}{}
{
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{Unicode({\mdseries\slshape list[, encoding]})\index{Unicode@\texttt{Unicode}}
\label{Unicode}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (operation)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{UChar({\mdseries\slshape num})\index{UChar@\texttt{UChar}}
\label{UChar}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (operation)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{IsUnicodeString\index{IsUnicodeString@\texttt{IsUnicodeString}}
\label{IsUnicodeString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (filter)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{IsUnicodeCharacter\index{IsUnicodeCharacter@\texttt{IsUnicodeCharacter}}
\label{IsUnicodeCharacter}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (filter)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{IntListUnicodeString({\mdseries\slshape ustr})\index{IntListUnicodeString@\texttt{IntListUnicodeString}}
\label{IntListUnicodeString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
Unicode characters are described by their \emph{codepoint}, an integer in the range from $0$ to $2^{21}-1$. For details about unicode, see \href{http://www.unicode.org} {\texttt{http://www.unicode.org}}.
The function \texttt{UChar} wraps an integer \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape num}} into a \textsf{GAP} object lying in the filter \texttt{IsUnicodeCharacter}. Use \texttt{Int} to get the codepoint back. The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape num}} can also be a \textsf{GAP} character which is then translated to an integer via \texttt{IntChar} (\textbf{Reference: IntChar}).
\texttt{Unicode} produces a \textsf{GAP} object in the filter \texttt{IsUnicodeString}. This is a wrapped list of integers for the unicode characters in the string.
The function \texttt{IntListUnicodeString} gives access to this list of integers. Basic list functionality is available
for \texttt{IsUnicodeString} elements. The entries are in \texttt{IsUnicodeCharacter}. The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape list}} for \texttt{Unicode} is either a list of integers or a \textsf{GAP} string. In the latter case an \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape encoding}} can be specified as string, its default is \texttt{"UTF-8"}.
\index{URL encoding}\index{RFC 3986} Currently supported encodings can be found in \texttt{UNICODE{\textunderscore}RECODE.NormalizedEncodings} (ASCII, ISO-8859-X, UTF-8 and aliases). The encoding \texttt{"XML"} means an ASCII encoding in which non-ASCII characters are specified by XML
character entities. The encoding \texttt{"URL"} is for URL-encoded (also called percent-encoded strings, as specified in RFC
3986 (\href{http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc3986.txt} {see here}). The listed encodings \texttt{"LaTeX"} and aliases cannot be used with \texttt{Unicode}. See the operation \texttt{Encode} (\ref{Encode}) for mapping a unicode string to a \textsf{GAP} string.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@ustr := Unicode("a and \366", "latin1");|
Unicode("a and \303\266")
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@ustr = Unicode("a and ö", "XML"); |
true
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@IntListUnicodeString(ustr);|
[ 97, 32, 97, 110, 100, 32, 246 ]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@ustr[7];|
''
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Encode}}
\logpage{[ 6, 2, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X818A31567EB30A39}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{Encode({\mdseries\slshape ustr[, encoding]})\index{Encode@\texttt{Encode}}
\label{Encode}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (operation)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a \textsf{GAP} string
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SimplifiedUnicodeString({\mdseries\slshape ustr[, encoding][, "single"]})\index{SimplifiedUnicodeString@\texttt{SimplifiedUnicodeString}}
\label{SimplifiedUnicodeString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a unicode string
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{LowercaseUnicodeString({\mdseries\slshape ustr})\index{LowercaseUnicodeString@\texttt{LowercaseUnicodeString}}
\label{LowercaseUnicodeString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a unicode string
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{UppercaseUnicodeString({\mdseries\slshape ustr})\index{UppercaseUnicodeString@\texttt{UppercaseUnicodeString}}
\label{UppercaseUnicodeString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a unicode string
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{LaTeXUnicodeTable\index{LaTeXUnicodeTable@\texttt{LaTeXUnicodeTable}}
\label{LaTeXUnicodeTable}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SimplifiedUnicodeTable\index{SimplifiedUnicodeTable@\texttt{SimplifiedUnicodeTable}}
\label{SimplifiedUnicodeTable}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{LowercaseUnicodeTable\index{LowercaseUnicodeTable@\texttt{LowercaseUnicodeTable}}
\label{LowercaseUnicodeTable}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (global variable)}}\\
The operation \texttt{Encode} translates a unicode string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape ustr}} into a \textsf{GAP} string in some specified \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape encoding}}. The default encoding is \texttt{"UTF-8"}.
Supported encodings can be found in \texttt{UNICODE{\textunderscore}RECODE.NormalizedEncodings}. Except for some cases mentioned below characters which are not available in
the target encoding are substituted by '?' characters.
If the \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape encoding}} is \texttt{"URL"} (see \texttt{Unicode} (\ref{Unicode})) then an optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape encreserved}} can be given, it must be a list of reserved characters which should be percent
encoded; the default is to encode only the \texttt{\%} character.
The encoding \texttt{"LaTeX"} substitutes non-ASCII characters and {\LaTeX} special characters by {\LaTeX} code as given in an ordered list \texttt{LaTeXUnicodeTable} of pairs [codepoint, string]. If you have a unicode character for which no
substitution is contained in that list, you will get a warning and the
translation is \texttt{Unicode(nr)}. In this case find a substitution and add a corresponding [codepoint, string]
pair to \texttt{LaTeXUnicodeTable} using \texttt{AddSet} (\textbf{Reference: AddSet}). Also, please, tell the \textsf{GAPDoc} authors about your addition, such that we can extend the list \texttt{LaTeXUnicodeTable}. (Most of the initial entries were generated from lists in the {\TeX} projects enc{\TeX} and \texttt{ucs}.) There are some variants of this encoding:
\texttt{"LaTeXleavemarkup"} does the same translations for non-ASCII characters but leaves the {\LaTeX} special characters (e.g., any {\LaTeX} commands) as they are.
\texttt{"LaTeXUTF8"} does not give a warning about unicode characters without explicit translation,
instead it translates the character to its \texttt{UTF-8} encoding. Make sure to setup your {\LaTeX} document such that all these characters are understood.
\texttt{"LaTeXUTF8leavemarkup"} is a combination of the last two variants.
Note that the \texttt{"LaTeX"} encoding can only be used with \texttt{Encode} but not for the opposite translation with \texttt{Unicode} (\ref{Unicode}) (which would need far too complicated heuristics).
The function \texttt{SimplifiedUnicodeString} can be used to substitute many non-ASCII characters by related ASCII
characters or strings (e.g., by a corresponding character without accents).
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape ustr}} and the result are unicode strings, if \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape encoding}} is \texttt{"ASCII"} then all non-ASCII characters are translated, otherwise only the non-latin1
characters. If the string \texttt{"single"} in an argument then only substitutions are considered which don't make the
result string longer. The translations are stored in a sorted list \texttt{SimplifiedUnicodeTable}. Its entries are of the form \texttt{[codepoint, trans1, trans2, ...]}. Here \texttt{trans1} and so on is either an integer for the codepoint of a substitution character
or it is a list of codepoint integers. If you are missing characters in this
list and know a sensible ASCII approximation, then add an entry (with \texttt{AddSet} (\textbf{Reference: AddSet})) and tell the \textsf{GAPDoc} authors about it. (The initial content of \texttt{SimplifiedUnicodeTable} was mainly generated from the ``\texttt{transtab}'' tables by Markus Kuhn.)
The function \texttt{LowercaseUnicodeString} gets and returns a unicode string and translates each uppercase character to
its corresponding lowercase version. This function uses a list \texttt{LowercaseUnicodeTable} of pairs of codepoint integers. This list was generated using the file \texttt{UnicodeData.txt} from the unicode definition (field 14 in each row).
The function \texttt{UppercaseUnicodeString} does the similar translation to uppercase characters.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@ustr := Unicode("a and ö", "XML");|
Unicode("a and \303\266")
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@SimplifiedUnicodeString(ustr, "ASCII");|
Unicode("a and oe")
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@SimplifiedUnicodeString(ustr, "ASCII", "single");|
Unicode("a and o")
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@ustr2 := UppercaseUnicodeString(ustr);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(Encode(ustr2, GAPInfo.TermEncoding), "\n");|
A AND
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Lengths of UTF-8 strings}}\logpage{[ 6, 2, 3 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X801237207E06A876}{}
{
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{WidthUTF8String({\mdseries\slshape str})\index{WidthUTF8String@\texttt{WidthUTF8String}}
\label{WidthUTF8String}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{NrCharsUTF8String({\mdseries\slshape str})\index{NrCharsUTF8String@\texttt{NrCharsUTF8String}}
\label{NrCharsUTF8String}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
an integer
Let \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} be a \textsf{GAP} string with text in UTF-8 encoding. There are three ``lengths'' of such a string which must be distinguished. The operation \texttt{Length} (\textbf{Reference: Length}) returns the number of bytes and so the memory occupied by \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}. The function \texttt{NrCharsUTF8String} returns the number of unicode characters in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}, that is the length of \texttt{Unicode(\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}})}.
In many applications the function \texttt{WidthUTF8String} is more interesting, it returns the number of columns needed by the string if
printed to a terminal. This takes into account that some unicode characters
are combining characters and that there are wide characters which need two
columns (e.g., for Chinese or Japanese). (To be precise: This implementation
assumes that there are no control characters in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} and uses the character width returned by the \texttt{wcwidth} function in the GNU C-library called with UTF-8 locale.)
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@# A, German umlaut u, B, zero width space, C, newline|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@str := Encode( Unicode( "AüB​C\n", "XML" ) );;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(str);|
ABC
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@# umlaut u needs two bytes and the zero width space three|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Length(str);|
9
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@NrCharsUTF8String(str);|
6
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@# zero width space and newline don't contribute to width|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@WidthUTF8String(str);|
4
\end{Verbatim}
}
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Print Utilities}}\label{PrintUtil}
\logpage{[ 6, 3, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X860C83047DC4F1BC}{}
{
The following printing utilities turned out to be useful for interactive work
with texts in \textsf{GAP}. But they are more general and so we document them here.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{PrintTo1}}
\logpage{[ 6, 3, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X8603B90C7C3F0AB1}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{PrintTo1({\mdseries\slshape filename, fun})\index{PrintTo1@\texttt{PrintTo1}}
\label{PrintTo1}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{AppendTo1({\mdseries\slshape filename, fun})\index{AppendTo1@\texttt{AppendTo1}}
\label{AppendTo1}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape fun}} must be a function without arguments. Everything which is printed by a call \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape fun()}} is printed into the file \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape filename}}. As with \texttt{PrintTo} (\textbf{Reference: PrintTo}) and \texttt{AppendTo} (\textbf{Reference: AppendTo}) this overwrites or appends to, respectively, a previous content of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape filename}}.
These functions can be particularly efficient when many small pieces of text
shall be written to a file, because no multiple reopening of the file is
necessary.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@f := function() local i; |
!gapprompt@>| !gapinput@ for i in [1..100000] do Print(i, "\n"); od; end;; |
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@PrintTo1("nonsense", f); # now check the local file `nonsense'|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{StringPrint}}
\logpage{[ 6, 3, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X829B720C86E57E8B}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StringPrint({\mdseries\slshape obj1[, obj2[, ...]]})\index{StringPrint@\texttt{StringPrint}}
\label{StringPrint}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StringView({\mdseries\slshape obj})\index{StringView@\texttt{StringView}}
\label{StringView}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
These functions return a string containing the output of a \texttt{Print} or \texttt{ViewObj} call with the same arguments.
This should be considered as a (temporary?) hack. It would be better to have \texttt{String} (\textbf{Reference: String}) methods for all \textsf{GAP} objects and to have a generic \texttt{Print} (\textbf{Reference: Print})-function which just interprets these strings. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{PrintFormattedString}}
\logpage{[ 6, 3, 3 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X812A8326844BC910}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{PrintFormattedString({\mdseries\slshape str})\index{PrintFormattedString@\texttt{PrintFormattedString}}
\label{PrintFormattedString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
This function prints a string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}. The difference to \texttt{Print(str);} is that no additional line breaks are introduced by \textsf{GAP}'s standard printing mechanism. This can be used to print lines which are
longer than the current screen width. In particular one can print text which
contains escape sequences like those explained in \texttt{TextAttr} (\ref{TextAttr}), where lines may have more characters than \emph{visible characters}. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Page}}
\logpage{[ 6, 3, 4 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7BB6731F7E3AAA98}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{Page({\mdseries\slshape ...})\index{Page@\texttt{Page}}
\label{Page}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{PageDisplay({\mdseries\slshape obj})\index{PageDisplay@\texttt{PageDisplay}}
\label{PageDisplay}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
These functions are similar to \texttt{Print} (\textbf{Reference: Print}) and \texttt{Display} (\textbf{Reference: Display}), respectively. The difference is that the output is not sent directly to the
screen, but is piped into the current pager; see \texttt{Pager} (\textbf{Reference: Pager}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Page([1..1421]+0);|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@PageDisplay(CharacterTable("Symmetric", 14));|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{StringFile}}
\logpage{[ 6, 3, 5 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7E14D32181FBC3C3}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StringFile({\mdseries\slshape filename})\index{StringFile@\texttt{StringFile}}
\label{StringFile}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{FileString({\mdseries\slshape filename, str[, append]})\index{FileString@\texttt{FileString}}
\label{FileString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
The function \texttt{StringFile} returns the content of file \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape filename}} as a string. This works efficiently with arbitrary (binary or text) files. If
something went wrong, this function returns \texttt{fail}.
Conversely the function \texttt{FileString} writes the content of a string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} into the file \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape filename}}. If the optional third argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape append}} is given and equals \texttt{true} then the content of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} is appended to the file. Otherwise previous content of the file is deleted.
This function returns the number of bytes written or \texttt{fail} if something went wrong.
Both functions are quite efficient, even with large files. }
}
}
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{Utilities for Bibliographies}}\label{ch:bibutil}
\logpage{[ 7, 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7EB94CE97ABF7192}{}
{
A standard for collecting references (in particular to mathematical texts) is Bib{\TeX} (\href{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/distribs/doc/} {\texttt{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/distribs/doc/}}). A disadvantage of Bib{\TeX} is that the format of the data is specified with the use by {\LaTeX} in mind. The data format is less suited for conversion to other document types
like plain text or HTML.
In the first section we describe utilities for using data from Bib{\TeX} files in \textsf{GAP}.
In the second section we introduce a new XML based data format BibXMLext for
bibliographies which seems better suited for other tasks than using it with {\LaTeX}.
Another section will describe utilities to deal with BibXMLext data in \textsf{GAP}.
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Parsing Bib{\TeX} Files}}\label{ParseBib}
\logpage{[ 7, 1, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7A4126EC7BD68F64}{}
{
Here are functions for parsing, normalizing and printing reference lists in Bib{\TeX} format. The reference describing this format is{\nobreakspace}\cite[Appendix B]{La85}.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{ParseBibFiles}}
\logpage{[ 7, 1, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X82555C307FDC1817}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ParseBibFiles({\mdseries\slshape bibfile1[, bibfile2[, ...]]})\index{ParseBibFiles@\texttt{ParseBibFiles}}
\label{ParseBibFiles}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ParseBibStrings({\mdseries\slshape str1[, str2[, ...]]})\index{ParseBibStrings@\texttt{ParseBibStrings}}
\label{ParseBibStrings}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
list \texttt{[list of bib-records, list of abbrevs, list of expansions]}
The first function parses the files \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bibfile1}} and so on (if a file does not exist the extension \texttt{.bib} is appended) in Bib{\TeX} format and returns a list as follows: \texttt{[entries, strings, texts]}. Here \texttt{entries} is a list of records, one record for each reference contained in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bibfile}}. Then \texttt{strings} is a list of abbreviations defined by \texttt{@string}-entries in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bibfile}} and \texttt{texts} is a list which contains in the corresponding position the full text for such
an abbreviation.
The second function does the same, but the input is given as \textsf{GAP} strings \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str1}} and so on.
The records in \texttt{entries} store key-value pairs of a Bib{\TeX} reference in the form \texttt{rec(key1 = value1, ...)}. The names of the keys are converted to lower case. The type of the reference
(i.e., book, article, ...) and the citation key are stored as components \texttt{.Type} and \texttt{.Label}. The records also have a \texttt{.From} field that says that the data are read from a Bib{\TeX} source.
As an example consider the following Bib{\TeX} file.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=doc/test.bib]
@string{ j = "Important Journal" }
@article{ AB2000, Author= "Fritz A. First and Sec, X. Y.",
TITLE="Short", journal = j, year = 2000 }
\end{Verbatim}
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib := ParseBibFiles("doc/test.bib");|
[ [ rec( From := rec( BibTeX := true ), Label := "AB2000",
Type := "article", author := "Fritz A. First and Sec, X. Y."
, journal := "Important Journal", title := "Short",
year := "2000" ) ], [ "j" ], [ "Important Journal" ] ]
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{NormalizedNameAndKey}}
\logpage{[ 7, 1, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7C9F0C337A0A0FF0}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{NormalizedNameAndKey({\mdseries\slshape namestr})\index{NormalizedNameAndKey@\texttt{NormalizedNameAndKey}}
\label{NormalizedNameAndKey}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
list of strings and names as lists
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{NormalizeNameAndKey({\mdseries\slshape r})\index{NormalizeNameAndKey@\texttt{NormalizeNameAndKey}}
\label{NormalizeNameAndKey}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape namestr}} must be a string describing an author or a list of authors as described in the Bib{\TeX} documentation in \cite[Appendix B 1.2]{La85}. The function \texttt{NormalizedNameAndKey} returns a list of the form [ normalized name string, short key, long key,
names as lists]. The first entry is a normalized form of the input where names
are written as ``lastname, first name initials''. The second and third entry are the name parts of a short and long key for
the bibliography entry, formed from the (initials of) last names. The fourth
entry is a list of lists, one for each name, where a name is described by
three strings for the last name, the first name initials and the first name(s)
as given in the input.
Note that the determination of the initials is limited to names where the
first letter is described by a single character (and does not contain some
markup, say for accents).
The function \texttt{NormalizeNameAndKey} gets as argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape r}} a record for a bibliography entry as returned by \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}). It substitutes \texttt{.author} and \texttt{.editor} fields of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape r}} by their normalized form, the original versions are stored in fields \texttt{.authororig} and \texttt{.editororig}.
Furthermore a short and a long citation key is generated and stored in
components \texttt{.printedkey} (only if no \texttt{.key} is already bound) and \texttt{.keylong}.
We continue the example from \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib := ParseBibFiles("doc/test.bib");;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@NormalizedNameAndKey(bib[1][1].author);|
[ "First, F. A. and Sec, X. Y.", "FS", "firstsec",
[ [ "First", "F. A.", "Fritz A." ], [ "Sec", "X. Y.", "X. Y." ] ] ]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@NormalizeNameAndKey(bib[1][1]);|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib[1][1];|
rec( From := rec( BibTeX := true ), Label := "AB2000",
Type := "article", author := "First, F. A. and Sec, X. Y.",
authororig := "Fritz A. First and Sec, X. Y.",
journal := "Important Journal", keylong := "firstsec2000",
printedkey := "FS00", title := "Short", year := "2000" )
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{WriteBibFile}}
\logpage{[ 7, 1, 3 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7C2B2F65851EAA0B}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{WriteBibFile({\mdseries\slshape bibfile, bib})\index{WriteBibFile@\texttt{WriteBibFile}}
\label{WriteBibFile}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
This is the converse of \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}). Here \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bib}} either must have a format as list of three lists as it is returned by \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}). Or \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bib}} can be a record as returned by \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextFiles}). A Bib{\TeX} file \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bibfile}} is written and the entries are formatted in a uniform way. All given
abbreviations are used while writing this file.
We continue the example from \texttt{NormalizeNameAndKey} (\ref{NormalizeNameAndKey}). The command
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@WriteBibFile("nicer.bib", bib);|
\end{Verbatim}
produces a file \texttt{nicer.bib} as follows:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=nicer.bib]
@string{j = "Important Journal" }
@article{ AB2000,
author = {First, F. A. and Sec, X. Y.},
title = {Short},
journal = j,
year = {2000},
authororig = {Fritz A. First and Sec, X. Y.},
keylong = {firstsec2000},
printedkey = {FS00}
}
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{InfoBibTools}}
\logpage{[ 7, 1, 4 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X85C1D50F7E37A99A}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{InfoBibTools\index{InfoBibTools@\texttt{InfoBibTools}}
\label{InfoBibTools}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (info class)}}\\
The default level of this info class is 1. Functions like \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}), \texttt{StringBibAs...} are then printing some information. You can suppress it by setting the level
of \texttt{InfoBibTools} to 0. With level 2 there may be some more information for debugging purposes. }
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{The BibXMLext Format}}\label{BibXMLformat}
\logpage{[ 7, 2, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7FB8F6BD80D859D1}{}
{
Bibliographical data in Bib{\TeX} files have the disadvantage that the actual data are given in {\LaTeX} syntax. This makes it difficult to use the data for anything but for {\LaTeX}, say for representations of the data as plain text or HTML. For example:
mathematical formulae are in {\LaTeX} \texttt{\$} environments, non-ASCII characters can be specified in many strange ways, and
how to specify URLs for links if the output format allows them?
Here we propose an XML data format for bibliographical data which addresses
these problems, it is called BibXMLext. In the next section we describe some
tools for generating (an approximation to) this data format from Bib{\TeX} data, and for using data given in BibXMLext format for various purposes.
The first motivation for this development was the handling of bibliographical
data in \textsf{GAPDoc}, but the format and the tools are certainly useful for other purposes as
well.
We started from a DTD \texttt{bibxml.dtd} which is publicly available, say from \href{http://bibtexml.sf.net/} {\texttt{http://bibtexml.sf.net/}}. This is essentially a reformulation of the definition of the Bib{\TeX} format, including several of some widely used further fields. This has already
the advantage that a generic XML parser can check the validity of the data
entries, for example for missing compulsary fields in entries. We applied the
following changes and extensions to define the DTD for BibXMLext, stored in
the file \texttt{bibxmlext.dtd} which can be found in the root directory of this \textsf{GAPDoc} package (and in Appendix \ref{bibxmlextdtd}):
\begin{description}
\item[{names}] Lists of names in the \texttt{author} and \texttt{editor} fields in Bib{\TeX} are difficult to parse. Here they must be given by a sequence of \texttt{{\textless}name{\textgreater}}-elements which each contain an optional \texttt{{\textless}first{\textgreater}}- and a \texttt{{\textless}last{\textgreater}}-element for the first and last names, respectively.
\item[{\texttt{{\textless}M{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}Math{\textgreater}}}] These elements enclose mathematical formulae, the content is {\LaTeX} code (without the \texttt{\$}). These should be handled in the same way as the elements with the same names
in \textsf{GAPDoc}, see \ref{M} and \ref{Math}. In particular, simple formulae which have a well defined plain text
representation can be given in \texttt{{\textless}M{\textgreater}}-elements.
\item[{Encoding}] Note that in XML files we can use the full range of unicode characters, see \href{http://www.unicode.org/} {\texttt{http://www.unicode.org/}}. All non-ASCII characters should be specified as unicode characters. This
makes dealing with special characters easy for plain text or HTML, only for
use with {\LaTeX} some sort of translation is necessary.
\item[{\texttt{{\textless}URL{\textgreater}}}] These elements are allowed everywhere in the text and should be represented by
links in converted formats which allow this. It is used in the same way as the
element with the same name in \textsf{GAPDoc}, see \ref{URL}.
\item[{\texttt{{\textless}Alt Only="..."{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}Alt Not="..."{\textgreater}}}] Sometimes information should be given in different ways, depending on the
output format of the data. This is possible with the \texttt{{\textless}Alt{\textgreater}}-elements with the same definition as in \textsf{GAPDoc}, see \ref{Alt}.
\item[{\texttt{{\textless}C{\textgreater}}}] This element should be used to protect text from case changes by converters
(the extra \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{123}}\texttt{\symbol{125}}} characters in Bib{\TeX} title fields).
\item[{\texttt{{\textless}string key="..." value="..."/{\textgreater}} and \texttt{{\textless}value key="..."/{\textgreater}}}] The \texttt{{\textless}string{\textgreater}}-element defines key-value pairs which can be used in any field via the \texttt{{\textless}value{\textgreater}}-element (not only for whole fields but also parts of the text).
\item[{\texttt{{\textless}other type="..."{\textgreater}}}] This is a generic element for fields which are otherwise not supported. An
arbitrary number of them is allowed for each entry, so any kind of additional
data can be added to entries.
\item[{\texttt{{\textless}Wrap Name="..."{\textgreater}}}] This generic element is allowed inside all fields. This markup will be just
ignored (but not the element content) by our standard tools. But it can be a
useful hook for introducing arbitrary further markup (and our tools can easily
be extended to handle it).
\item[{Extra entities}] The DTD defines the standard XML entities (\ref{XMLspchar} and the entities \texttt{\ } (non-breakable space), \texttt{\–} and \texttt{\©right;}. Use \texttt{\–} in page ranges.
\end{description}
For further details of the DTD we refer to the file \texttt{bibxmlext.dtd} itself which is shown in appendix \ref{bibxmlextdtd}. That file also recalls some information from the Bib{\TeX} documentation on how the standard fields of entries should be used. Which
entry types and which fields are supported (and the ordering of the fields
which is fixed by a DTD) can be either read off the DTD, or within \textsf{GAP} one can use the function \texttt{TemplateBibXML} (\ref{TemplateBibXML}) to get templates for the various entry types.
Here is an example of a BibXMLext document:
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=doc/testbib.xml]
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE file SYSTEM "bibxmlext.dtd">
<file>
<string key="j" value="Important Journal"/>
<entry id="AB2000"><article>
<author>
<name><first>Fritz A.</first><last>First</last></name>
<name><first>X. Y.</first><last>Secőnd</last></name>
</author>
<title>The <Wrap Name="Package"> <C>F</C>ritz</Wrap> package for the
formula <M>x^y - l_{{i+1}} \rightarrow \mathbb{R}</M></title>
<journal><value key="j"/></journal>
<year>2000</year>
<number>13</number>
<pages>13–25</pages>
<note>Online data at <URL Text="Bla Bla Publisher">
http://www.publish.com/~ImpJ/123#data</URL></note>
<other type="mycomment">very useful</other>
</article></entry>
</file>
\end{Verbatim}
There is a standard XML header and a \texttt{DOCTYPE} declaration refering to the \texttt{bibxmlext.dtd} DTD mentioned above. Local entities could be defined in the \texttt{DOCTYPE} tag as shown in the example in \ref{GDent}. The actual content of the document is inside a \texttt{{\textless}file{\textgreater}}-element, it consists of \texttt{{\textless}string{\textgreater}}- and \texttt{{\textless}entry{\textgreater}}-elements. Several of the BibXMLext markup features are shown. We will use
this input document for some examples below. }
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Utilities for BibXMLext data}}\label{BibXMLtools}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7AC255DE7D2531B6}{}
{
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Translating Bib{\TeX} to BibXMLext}}\label{Subsect:IntroXMLBib}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 1 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7C5548E77ECA29D7}{}
{
First we describe a tool which can translate bibliography entries from Bib{\TeX} data to BibXMLext \texttt{{\textless}entry{\textgreater}}-elements. It also does some validation of the data. In some cases it is
desirable to improve the result by hand afterwards (editing formulae, adding \texttt{{\textless}URL{\textgreater}}-elements, translating non-ASCII characters to unicode, ...).
See \texttt{WriteBibXMLextFile} (\ref{WriteBibXMLextFile}) below for how to write the results to a BibXMLext file. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.Apply}}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 2 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7A025E0A7A1CD390}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.Apply({\mdseries\slshape str})\index{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.Apply@\texttt{Heuristic}\-\texttt{Translations}\-\texttt{La}\-\texttt{Te}\-\texttt{X2}\-\texttt{X}\-\texttt{M}\-\texttt{L.}\-\texttt{Apply}}
\label{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.Apply}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a string
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.ApplyFile({\mdseries\slshape fnam[, outnam]})\index{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.ApplyFile@\texttt{Heuristic}\-\texttt{Translations}\-\texttt{La}\-\texttt{Te}\-\texttt{X2}\-\texttt{X}\-\texttt{M}\-\texttt{L.}\-\texttt{Apply}\-\texttt{File}}
\label{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.ApplyFile}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
These utilities translate some {\LaTeX} code into text in UTF-8 encoding. The input is given as a string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}, or a file name \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape fnam}}, respectively. The first function returns the translated string. The second
function with one argument overwrites the given file with the translated text.
Optionally, the translated file content can be written to another file, if its
name is given as second argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape outnam}}.
The record \texttt{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML} mainly contains translations of {\LaTeX} macros for special characters which were found in hundreds of Bib{\TeX} entries from \href{http://www.ams.org/mathscinet/} {MathSciNet}. Just look at this record if you want to know how it works. It is easy to
extend, and if you have improvements which may be of general interest, please
send them to the \textsf{GAPDoc} author.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@s := "\\\"u\\'{e}\\`e{\\ss}";;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(s, "\n"); |
\"u\'{e}\`e{\ss}
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.Apply(s),"\n");|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{StringBibAsXMLext}}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 3 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X85F33C64787A00B7}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StringBibAsXMLext({\mdseries\slshape bibentry[, abbrvs, vals][, encoding]})\index{StringBibAsXMLext@\texttt{StringBibAsXMLext}}
\label{StringBibAsXMLext}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a string with XML code, or \texttt{fail}
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bibentry}} is a record representing an entry from a Bib{\TeX} file, as returned in the first list of the result of \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}). The optional two arguments \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape abbrvs}} and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape vals}} can be lists of abbreviations and substitution strings, as returned as second
and third list element in the result of \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}). The optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape encoding}} specifies the character encoding of the string components of \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bibentry}}. If this is not given it is checked if all strings are valid UTF-8 encoded
strings, in that case it is assumed that the encoding is UTF-8, otherwise the
latin1 encoding is assumed.
The function \texttt{StringBibAsXMLext} creates XML code of an \texttt{{\textless}entry{\textgreater}}-element in \texttt{BibXMLext} format. The result is in UTF-8 encoding and contains some heuristic
translations, like splitting name lists, finding places for \texttt{{\textless}C{\textgreater}}-elements, putting formulae in \texttt{{\textless}M{\textgreater}}-elements, substituting some characters. The result should always be checked
and maybe improved by hand. Some validity checks are applied to the given
data, for example if all non-optional fields are given. If this check fails
the function returns \texttt{fail}.
If your Bib{\TeX} input contains {\LaTeX} markup for special characters, it can be convenient to translate this input
with \texttt{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.Apply} (\ref{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.Apply}) or \texttt{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.ApplyFile} (\ref{HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.ApplyFile}) before parsing it as Bib{\TeX}.
As an example we consider again the short Bib{\TeX} file \texttt{doc/test.bib} shown in the example for \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib := ParseBibFiles("doc/test.bib");;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@str := StringBibAsXMLext(bib[1][1], bib[2], bib[3]);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(str, "\n");|
<entry id="AB2000"><article>
<author>
<name><first>Fritz A.</first><last>First</last></name>
<name><first>X. Y.</first><last>Sec</last></name>
</author>
<title>Short</title>
<journal><value key="j"/></journal>
<year>2000</year>
</article></entry>
\end{Verbatim}
}
The following functions allow parsing of data which are already in BibXMLext
format.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{ParseBibXMLextString}}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 4 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X86BD29AE7A453721}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ParseBibXMLextString({\mdseries\slshape str})\index{ParseBibXMLextString@\texttt{ParseBibXMLextString}}
\label{ParseBibXMLextString}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles({\mdseries\slshape fname1[, fname2[, ...]]})\index{ParseBibXMLextFiles@\texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles}}
\label{ParseBibXMLextFiles}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a record with fields \texttt{.entries}, \texttt{.strings} and \texttt{.entities}
The first function gets a string \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}} containing a \texttt{BibXMLext} document or a part of it. It returns a record with the three mentioned fields.
Here \texttt{.entries} is a list of partial XML parse trees for the \texttt{{\textless}entry{\textgreater}}-elements in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}. The field \texttt{.strings} is a list of key-value pairs from the \texttt{{\textless}string{\textgreater}}-elements in \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape str}}. And \texttt{.strings} is a list of name-value pairs of the named entities which were used during the
parsing.
The second function \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles} uses the first on the content of all files given by filenames \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape fname1}} and so on. It collects the results in a single record.
As an example we parse the file \texttt{testbib.xml} shown in \ref{BibXMLformat}.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib := ParseBibXMLextFiles("doc/testbib.xml");;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@RecFields(bib);|
[ "entries", "strings", "entities" ]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib.entries;|
[ <BibXMLext entry: AB2000> ]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib.strings;|
[ [ "j", "Important Journal" ] ]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib.entities[1]; |
[ "amp", "&#38;" ]
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{WriteBibXMLextFile}}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 5 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7811108C7E5B1709}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{WriteBibXMLextFile({\mdseries\slshape fname, bib})\index{WriteBibXMLextFile@\texttt{WriteBibXMLextFile}}
\label{WriteBibXMLextFile}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
This function writes a BibXMLext file with name \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape fname}}.
There are three possibilities to specify the bibliography entries in the
argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bib}}. It can be a list of three lists as returned by \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}). Or it can be just the first of such three lists in which case the other two
lists are assumed to be empty. To all entries of the (first) list the function \texttt{StringBibAsXMLext} (\ref{StringBibAsXMLext}) is applied and the resulting strings are written to the result file.
The third possibility is that \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bib}} is a record in the format as returned by \texttt{ParseBibXMLextString} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextString}) and \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextFiles}). In this case the entries for the BibXMLext file are produced with \texttt{StringXMLElement} (\ref{StringXMLElement}), and if \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape bib}}\texttt{.entities} is bound then it is tried to resubstitute parts of the string by the given
entities with \texttt{EntitySubstitution} (\ref{EntitySubstitution}).
As an example we write back the result of the example shown for \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextFiles}) to an equivalent XML file.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib := ParseBibXMLextFiles("doc/testbib.xml");;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@WriteBibXMLextFile("test.xml", bib);|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{Bibliography Entries as Records}}\label{Subsect:RecBib}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 6 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X82167F1280F4310E}{}
{
For working with BibXMLext entries we find it convenient to first translate
the parse tree of an entry, as returned by \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextFiles}), to a record with the field names of the entry as components whose value is
the content of the field as string. These strings are generated with respect
to a result type. The records are generated by the following function which
can be customized by the user. }
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{RecBibXMLEntry}}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 7 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X786C33ED79F425F1}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{RecBibXMLEntry({\mdseries\slshape entry[, restype][, strings][, options]})\index{RecBibXMLEntry@\texttt{RecBibXMLEntry}}
\label{RecBibXMLEntry}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a record with fields as strings
This function generates a content string for each field of a bibliography
entry and assigns them to record components. This content may depend on the
requested result type and possibly some given options.
The arguments are as follows: \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape entry}} is the parse tree of an \texttt{{\textless}entry{\textgreater}} element as returned by \texttt{ParseBibXMLextString} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextString}) or \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextFiles}). The optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}} describes the type of the result. This package supports currently the types \texttt{"BibTeX"}, \texttt{"Text"} and \texttt{"HTML"}. The default is \texttt{"BibTeX"}. The optional argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape strings}} must be a list of key-value pairs as returned in the component \texttt{.strings} in the result of \texttt{ParseBibXMLextString} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextString}). The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape options}} must be a record.
If the entry contains an \texttt{author} field then the result will also contain a component \texttt{.authorAsList} which is a list containing for each author a list with three entries of the
form \texttt{[last name, first name initials, first name]} (the third entry means the first name as given in the data). Similarly, an \texttt{editor} field is accompanied by a component \texttt{.editorAsList}.
The following \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape options}} are currently supported.
If \texttt{options.fullname} is bound and set to \texttt{true} then the full given first names for authors and editors will be used, the
default is to use the initials of the first names. Also, if \texttt{options.namefirstlast} is bound and set to \texttt{true} then the names are written in the form ``first-name(s) last-name'', the default is the form ``last-name, first-name(s)''.
If \texttt{options.href} is bound and set to \texttt{false} then the \texttt{"BibTeX"} type result will not use \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}href} commands. The default is to produce \texttt{\texttt{\symbol{92}}href} commands from \texttt{{\textless}URL{\textgreater}}-elements such that {\LaTeX} with the \texttt{hyperref} package can produce links for them.
The content of an \texttt{{\textless}Alt{\textgreater}}-element with \texttt{Only}-attribute is included if \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}} is given in the attribute and ignored otherwise, and vice versa in case of a \texttt{Not}-attribute. If \texttt{options.useAlt} is bound, it must be a list of strings to which \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}} is added. Then an \texttt{{\textless}Alt{\textgreater}}-element with \texttt{Only}-attribute is evaluated if the intersection of \texttt{options.useAlt} and the types given in the attribute is not empty. In case of a \texttt{Not}-attribute the element is evaluated if this intersection is empty.
If \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}} is \texttt{"BibTeX"} then the string fields in the result will be recoded with \texttt{Encode} (\ref{Encode}) and target \texttt{"LaTeX"}. If \texttt{options.hasLaTeXmarkup} is bound and set to \texttt{true} (for example, because the data are originally read from Bib{\TeX} files), then the target \texttt{"LaTeXleavemarkup"} will be used.
We use again the file shown in the example for \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextFiles}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib := ParseBibXMLextFiles("doc/testbib.xml");;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@e := bib.entries[1];; strs := bib.strings;;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(RecBibXMLEntry(e, "BibTeX", strs), "\n");|
rec(
From := rec(
BibXML := true,
options := rec(
),
type := "BibTeX" ),
Label := "AB2000",
Type := "article",
author := "First, F. A. and Sec{\\H o}nd, X. Y.",
authorAsList :=
[ [ "First", "F. A.", "Fritz A." ],
[ "Sec\305\221nd", "X. Y.", "X. Y." ] ],
journal := "Important Journal",
mycomment := "very useful",
note :=
"Online data at \\href {http://www.publish.com/~ImpJ/123#data} {Bla\
Bla Publisher}",
number := "13",
pages := "13{\\textendash}25",
printedkey := "FS00",
title :=
"The {F}ritz package for the \n formula $x^y - l_{{i+1}} \
\\rightarrow \\mathbb{R}$",
year := "2000" )
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(RecBibXMLEntry(e, "HTML", strs).note, "\n");|
Online data at <a href="http://www.publish.com/~ImpJ/123#data">Bla Bla\
Publisher</a>
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{AddHandlerBuildRecBibXMLEntry}}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 8 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X8067261385905A36}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{AddHandlerBuildRecBibXMLEntry({\mdseries\slshape elementname, restype, handler})\index{AddHandlerBuildRecBibXMLEntry@\texttt{AddHandlerBuildRecBibXMLEntry}}
\label{AddHandlerBuildRecBibXMLEntry}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
nothing
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape elementname}} must be the name of an entry field supported by the BibXMLext format, the name
of one of the special elements \texttt{"C"}, \texttt{"M"}, \texttt{"Math"}, \texttt{"URL"} or of the form \texttt{"Wrap:myname"} or any string \texttt{"mytype"} (which then corresponds to entry fields \texttt{{\textless}other type="mytype"{\textgreater}}). The string \texttt{"Finish"} has an exceptional meaning, see below.
\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}} is a string describing the result type for which the handler is installed, see \texttt{RecBibXMLEntry} (\ref{RecBibXMLEntry}).
For both arguments, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape elementname}} and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}}, it is also possible to give lists of the described ones for installing
several handler at once.
The argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape handler}} must be a function with five arguments of the form \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape handler}}\texttt{(entry, r, restype, strings, options)}. Here \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape entry}} is a parse tree of a BibXMLext \texttt{{\textless}entry{\textgreater}}-element, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape r}} is a node in this tree for an element \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape elementname}}, and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape strings}} and \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape options}} are as explained in \texttt{RecBibXMLEntry} (\ref{RecBibXMLEntry}). The function should return a string representing the content of the node \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape r}}. If \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape elementname}} is of the form \texttt{"Wrap:myname"} the handler is used for elements of form \texttt{{\textless}Wrap Name="myname"{\textgreater}...{\textless}/Wrap{\textgreater}}.
If \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape elementname}} is \texttt{"Finish"} the handler should look like above except that now \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape r}} is the record generated by \texttt{RecBibXMLEntry} (\ref{RecBibXMLEntry}) just before it is returned. Here the handler should return nothing. It can be
used to manipulate the record \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape r}}, for example for changing the encoding of the strings or for adding some more
components.
The installed handler is called by \texttt{BuildRecBibXMLEntry(}\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape entry}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape r}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape strings}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape options}}\texttt{)}. The string for the whole content of an element can be generated by \texttt{ContentBuildRecBibXMLEntry(}\mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape entry}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape r}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape strings}}, \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape options}}\texttt{)}.
We continue the example from \texttt{RecBibXMLEntry} (\ref{RecBibXMLEntry}) and install a handler for the \texttt{{\textless}Wrap Name="Package"{\textgreater}}-element such that {\LaTeX} puts its content in a sans serif font.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@AddHandlerBuildRecBibXMLEntry("Wrap:Package", "BibTeX",|
!gapprompt@>| !gapinput@function(entry, r, restype, strings, options)|
!gapprompt@>| !gapinput@ return Concatenation("\\textsf{", ContentBuildRecBibXMLEntry(|
!gapprompt@>| !gapinput@ entry, r, restype, strings, options), "}");|
!gapprompt@>| !gapinput@end);|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(RecBibXMLEntry(e, "BibTeX", strs).title, "\n");|
The \textsf{ {F}ritz} package for the
formula $x^y - l_{{i+1}} \rightarrow \mathbb{R}$
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(RecBibXMLEntry(e, "Text", strs).title, "\n"); |
The Fritz package for the
formula x^y - l_{i+1} -> R
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@AddHandlerBuildRecBibXMLEntry("Wrap:Package", "BibTeX", "Ignore");|
\end{Verbatim}
}
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{StringBibXMLEntry}}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 9 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X790A295680F7CD24}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{StringBibXMLEntry({\mdseries\slshape entry[, restype][, strings][, options]})\index{StringBibXMLEntry@\texttt{StringBibXMLEntry}}
\label{StringBibXMLEntry}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a string
The arguments of this function have the same meaning as in \texttt{RecBibXMLEntry} (\ref{RecBibXMLEntry}) but the return value is a string representing the bibliography entry in a
format specified by \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}} (default is \texttt{"BibTeX"}).
Currently, the following cases for \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape restype}} are supported:
\begin{description}
\item[{\texttt{"BibTeX"}}] A string with Bib{\TeX} source code is generated.
\item[{\texttt{"Text"}}] A text representation of the text is returned. If \texttt{options.ansi} is bound it must be a record. The components must have names \texttt{Bib{\textunderscore}Label}, \texttt{Bib{\textunderscore}author}, and so on for all fieldnames. The value of each component is a pair of
strings which will enclose the content of the field in the result or the first
of these strings in which case the default for the second is \texttt{TextAttr.reset} (see \texttt{TextAttr} (\ref{TextAttr})). If you give an empty record here, some default ANSI color markup will be
used.
\item[{\texttt{"HTML"}}] An HTML representation of the bibliography entry is returned. The text from
each field is enclosed in markup (mostly \texttt{{\textless}span{\textgreater}}-elements) with the \texttt{class} attribute set to the field name. This allows a detailed layout of the code via
a style sheet file.
\end{description}
We use again the file shown in the example for \texttt{ParseBibXMLextFiles} (\ref{ParseBibXMLextFiles}).
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!|C,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt|gap>C !gapinput|bib := ParseBibXMLextFiles("doc/testbib.xml");;C
!gapprompt|gap>C !gapinput|e := bib.entries[1];; strs := bib.strings;;C
!gapprompt|gap>C !gapinput|ebib := StringBibXMLEntry(e, "BibTeX", strs);;C
!gapprompt|gap>C !gapinput|PrintFormattedString(ebib);C
@article{ AB2000,
author = {First, F. A. and Sec{\H o}nd, X. Y.},
title = {The {F}ritz package for the formula $x^y -
l_{{i+1}} \rightarrow \mathbb{R}$},
journal = {Important Journal},
number = {13},
year = {2000},
pages = {13{\textendash}25},
note = {Online data at \href
{http://www.publish.com/~ImpJ/123#data} {Bla
Bla Publisher}},
mycomment = {very useful},
printedkey = {FS00}
}
!gapprompt|gap>C !gapinput|etxt := StringBibXMLEntry(e, "Text", strs);; C
!gapprompt|gap>C !gapinput|etxt := SimplifiedUnicodeString(Unicode(etxt), "latin1", "single");;C
!gapprompt|gap>C !gapinput|etxt := Encode(etxt, GAPInfo.TermEncoding);; C
!gapprompt|gap>C !gapinput|PrintFormattedString(etxt);C
[FS00] First, F. A. and Second, X. Y., The Fritz package for the
formula x^y - l_{i+1} ? R, Important Journal, 13 (2000), 13-25,
(Online data at Bla Bla Publisher
(http://www.publish.com/~ImpJ/123#data)).
\end{Verbatim}
}
The following command may be useful to generate completly new bibliography
entries in BibXMLext format. It also informs about the supported entry types
and field names.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{TemplateBibXML}}
\logpage{[ 7, 3, 10 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X7C6FF57087016019}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{TemplateBibXML({\mdseries\slshape [type]})\index{TemplateBibXML@\texttt{TemplateBibXML}}
\label{TemplateBibXML}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
list of types or string
Without an argument this function returns a list of the supported entry types
in BibXMLext documents.
With an argument \mbox{\texttt{\mdseries\slshape type}} of one of the supported types the function returns a string which is a
template for a corresponding BibXMLext entry. Optional field elements have a \texttt{*} appended. If an element has the word \texttt{OR} appended, then either this element or the next must/can be given, not both. If \texttt{AND/OR} is appended then this and/or the next can/must be given. Elements which can
appear several times have a \texttt{+} appended. Places to fill are marked by an \texttt{X}.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@TemplateBibXML();|
[ "article", "book", "booklet", "conference", "inbook",
"incollection", "inproceedings", "manual", "mastersthesis", "misc",
"phdthesis", "proceedings", "techreport", "unpublished" ]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@Print(TemplateBibXML("inbook"));|
<entry id="X"><inbook>
<author>
<name><first>X</first><last>X</last></name>+
</author>OR
<editor>
<name><first>X</first><last>X</last></name>+
</editor>
<title>X</title>
<chapter>X</chapter>AND/OR
<pages>X</pages>
<publisher>X</publisher>
<year>X</year>
<volume>X</volume>*OR
<number>X</number>*
<series>X</series>*
<type>X</type>*
<address>X</address>*
<edition>X</edition>*
<month>X</month>*
<note>X</note>*
<key>X</key>*
<annotate>X</annotate>*
<crossref>X</crossref>*
<abstract>X</abstract>*
<affiliation>X</affiliation>*
<contents>X</contents>*
<copyright>X</copyright>*
<isbn>X</isbn>*OR
<issn>X</issn>*
<keywords>X</keywords>*
<language>X</language>*
<lccn>X</lccn>*
<location>X</location>*
<mrnumber>X</mrnumber>*
<mrclass>X</mrclass>*
<mrreviewer>X</mrreviewer>*
<price>X</price>*
<size>X</size>*
<url>X</url>*
<category>X</category>*
<other type="X">X</other>*+
</inbook></entry>
\end{Verbatim}
}
}
\section{\textcolor{Chapter }{Getting Bib{\TeX} entries from \textsf{MathSciNet}}}\label{MathSciNet}
\logpage{[ 7, 4, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X826901BD844D3F87}{}
{
We provide utilities to access the \href{http://www.ams.org/mathscinet/} {\textsf{ MathSciNet}} data base from within GAP. One condition for this to work is that the \textsf{IO}-package \cite{IO} is available. The other is, of course, that you use these functions from a
computer which has access to \textsf{MathSciNet}.
Please note, that the usual license for \textsf{MathSciNet} access does not allow for automated searches in the database. Therefore, only
use the \texttt{SearchMR} (\ref{SearchMR}) function for single queries, as you would do using your webbrowser.
\subsection{\textcolor{Chapter }{SearchMR}}
\logpage{[ 7, 4, 1 ]}\nobreak
\hyperdef{L}{X8009F8A17DDFF9AF}{}
{\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SearchMR({\mdseries\slshape qurec})\index{SearchMR@\texttt{SearchMR}}
\label{SearchMR}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\noindent\textcolor{FuncColor}{$\triangleright$\ \ \texttt{SearchMRBib({\mdseries\slshape bib})\index{SearchMRBib@\texttt{SearchMRBib}}
\label{SearchMRBib}
}\hfill{\scriptsize (function)}}\\
\textbf{\indent Returns:\ }
a list of strings, a string or \texttt{fail}
The first function \texttt{SearchMR} provides the same functionality as the Web interface \href{http://www.ams.org/mathscinet/} {\textsf{ MathSciNet}}. The query strings must be given as a record, and the following components of
this record are recognized: \texttt{Author}, \texttt{AuthorRelated}, \texttt{Title}, \texttt{ReviewText}, \texttt{Journal}, \texttt{InstitutionCode}, \texttt{Series}, \texttt{MSCPrimSec}, \texttt{MSCPrimary}, \texttt{MRNumber}, \texttt{Anywhere}, \texttt{References} and \texttt{Year}.
Furthermore, the component \texttt{type} can be specified. It can be one of \texttt{"bibtex"} (the default if not given), \texttt{"pdf"}, \texttt{"html"} and probably others. In the last cases the function returns a string with the
correspondig PDF-file or web page from \textsf{MathSciNet}. In the first case the \textsf{MathSciNet} interface returns a web page with Bib{\TeX} entries, for convenience this function returns a list of strings, each
containing the Bib{\TeX} text for a single result entry.
The format of a \texttt{.Year} component can be either a four digit number, optionally preceded by one of the
characters \texttt{'{\textless}'}, \texttt{'{\textgreater}'} or \texttt{'='}, or it can be two four digit numbers separated by a \texttt{-} to specify a year range.
The function \texttt{SearchMRBib} gets a record of a parsed Bib{\TeX} entry as input as returned by \texttt{ParseBibFiles} (\ref{ParseBibFiles}) or \texttt{ParseBibStrings} (\ref{ParseBibStrings}). It tries to generate some sensible input from this information for \texttt{SearchMR} and calls that function.
\begin{Verbatim}[commandchars=!@|,fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=Example]
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@ll := SearchMR(rec(Author:="Gauss", Title:="Disquisitiones"));;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@ll2 := List(ll, HeuristicTranslationsLaTeX2XML.Apply);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib := ParseBibStrings(Concatenation(ll2));;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bibxml := List(bib[1], StringBibAsXMLext);;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@bib2 := ParseBibXMLextString(Concatenation(bibxml));;|
!gapprompt@gap>| !gapinput@for b in bib2.entries do |
!gapprompt@>| !gapinput@ PrintFormattedString(StringBibXMLEntry(b, "Text")); od; |
[Gau95] Gauss, C. F., Disquisitiones arithmeticae, Academia
Colombiana de Ciencias Exactas Fsicas y Naturales, Coleccin
Enrique Prez Arbelez [Enrique Prez Arbelez Collection], 10,
Bogot (1995), xliv+495 pages, (Translated from the Latin by Hugo
Barrantes Campos, Michael Josephy and ngel Ruiz Ziga, With a
preface by Ruiz Ziga).
[Gau86] Gauss, C. F., Disquisitiones arithmeticae, Springer-Verlag,
New York (1986), xx+472 pages, (Translated and with a preface by
Arthur A. Clarke, Revised by William C. Waterhouse, Cornelius
Greither and A. W. Grootendorst and with a preface by Waterhouse).
[Gau66] Gauss, C. F., Disquisitiones arithmeticae, Yale University
Press, Translated into English by Arthur A. Clarke, S. J, New Haven,
Conn. (1966), xx+472 pages.
\end{Verbatim}
}
}
}
\appendix
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{The File \texttt{3k+1.xml}}}\label{app:3k+1}
\logpage{[ "A", 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7DC4C82B87717D1C}{}
{
Here is the complete source of the example \textsf{GAPDoc} document \texttt{3k+1.xml} discussed in Section{\nobreakspace}\ref{sec:3k+1expl}.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=3k+1.xml]
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!-- A complete "fake package" documentation
-->
<!DOCTYPE Book SYSTEM "gapdoc.dtd">
<Book Name="3k+1">
<TitlePage>
<Title>The <Package>ThreeKPlusOne</Package> Package</Title>
<Version>Version 42</Version>
<Author>Dummy Authr
<Email>3kplusone@dev.null</Email>
</Author>
<Copyright>©right; 2000 The Author. <P/>
You can do with this package what you want.<P/> Really.
</Copyright>
</TitlePage>
<TableOfContents/>
<Body>
<Chapter> <Heading>The <M>3k+1</M> Problem</Heading>
<Section Label="sec:theory"> <Heading>Theory</Heading>
Let <M>k \in &NN;</M> be a natural number. We consider the
sequence <M>n(i, k), i \in &NN;,</M> with <M>n(1, k) = k</M> and
else <M>n(i+1, k) = n(i, k) / 2</M> if <M>n(i, k)</M> is even
and <M>n(i+1, k) = 3 n(i, k) + 1</M> if <M>n(i, k)</M> is odd.
<P/> It is not known whether for any natural number <M>k \in
&NN;</M> there is an <M>m \in &NN;</M> with <M>n(m, k) = 1</M>.
<P/>
<Package>ThreeKPlusOne</Package> provides the function <Ref
Func="ThreeKPlusOneSequence"/> to explore this for given
<M>n</M>. If you really want to know something about this
problem, see <Cite Key="Wi98"/> or
<URL>http://mathsrv.ku-eichstaett.de/MGF/homes/wirsching/</URL>
for more details (and forget this package).
</Section>
<Section> <Heading>Program</Heading>
In this section we describe the main function of this package.
<ManSection>
<Func Name="ThreeKPlusOneSequence" Arg="k[, max]"/>
<Description>
This function computes for a natural number <A>k</A> the
beginning of the sequence <M>n(i, k)</M> defined in section
<Ref Sect="sec:theory"/>. The sequence stops at the first
<M>1</M> or at <M>n(<A>max</A>, k)</M>, if <A>max</A> is
given.
<Example>
gap> ThreeKPlusOneSequence(101);
"Sorry, not yet implemented. Wait for Version 84 of the package"
</Example>
</Description>
</ManSection>
</Section>
</Chapter>
</Body>
<Bibliography Databases="3k+1" />
<TheIndex/>
</Book>
\end{Verbatim}
}
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{The File \texttt{gapdoc.dtd}}}\label{GAPDocdtd}
\logpage{[ "B", 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X85274DD38456275D}{}
{
For easier reference we repeat here the complete content of the file \texttt{gapdoc.dtd}.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=gapdoc.dtd]
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!-- ==================================================================
gapdoc.dtd - XML Document type definition for GAP documentation
By Frank Lbeck and Max Neunhffer
================================================================== -->
<!-- Note that this definition goes "bottom-up" because entities can only
be used after their definition in the file. -->
<!-- ==================================================================
Some entities:
================================================================== -->
<!-- The standard XML entities: -->
<!ENTITY lt "&#60;">
<!ENTITY gt ">">
<!ENTITY amp "&#38;">
<!ENTITY apos "'">
<!ENTITY quot """>
<!-- The following were introduced in GAPDoc version < 1.0, it is no longer
necessary to take care of LaTeX special characters
(we keep the entities with simplified definitions for compatibility) -->
<!ENTITY tamp "&">
<!ENTITY tlt "<">
<!ENTITY tgt ">">
<!ENTITY hash "#">
<!ENTITY dollar "$">
<!ENTITY percent "%">
<!ENTITY tilde "~">
<!ENTITY bslash "\\">
<!ENTITY obrace "{">
<!ENTITY cbrace "}">
<!ENTITY uscore "_">
<!ENTITY circum "^">
<!-- ==================================================================
Our predefined entities:
================================================================== -->
<!ENTITY nbsp " ">
<!ENTITY ndash "–">
<!ENTITY GAP "<Package>GAP</Package>">
<!ENTITY GAPDoc "<Package>GAPDoc</Package>">
<!ENTITY TeX
"<Alt Only='LaTeX'>{\TeX}</Alt><Alt Not='LaTeX'>TeX</Alt>">
<!ENTITY LaTeX
"<Alt Only='LaTeX'>{\LaTeX}</Alt><Alt Not='LaTeX'>LaTeX</Alt>">
<!ENTITY BibTeX
"<Alt Only='LaTeX'>{Bib\TeX}</Alt><Alt Not='LaTeX'>BibTeX</Alt>">
<!ENTITY MeatAxe "<Package>MeatAxe</Package>">
<!ENTITY XGAP "<Package>XGAP</Package>">
<!ENTITY copyright "©">
<!-- and unicode math symbols -->
<!ENTITY CC "ℂ" > <!-- double struck -->
<!ENTITY ZZ "ℤ" >
<!ENTITY NN "ℕ" >
<!ENTITY PP "ℙ" >
<!ENTITY QQ "ℚ" >
<!ENTITY HH "ℍ" >
<!ENTITY RR "ℝ" >
<!-- ==================================================================
The following describes the "innermost" documentation text which
can occur at various places in the document like for example
section headings. It does neither contain further sectioning
elements nor environments like Enums or Lists.
================================================================== -->
<!ENTITY % InnerText "#PCDATA |
Alt |
Emph | E |
Par | P | Br |
Keyword | K | Arg | A | Quoted | Q | Code | C |
File | F | Button | B | Package |
M | Math | Display |
Example | Listing | Log | Verb |
URL | Email | Homepage | Address | Cite | Label |
Ref | Index |
Ignore" >
<!ELEMENT Alt (%InnerText;)*> <!-- This is only to allow "Only" and
"Not" attributes for normal text -->
<!ATTLIST Alt Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!-- The following elements declare a certain block of InnerText to
have a certain property. They are non-terminal and can contain
any InnerText recursively. -->
<!ELEMENT Emph (%InnerText;)*> <!-- Emphasize something -->
<!ELEMENT E (%InnerText;)*> <!-- the same as shortcut -->
<!-- The following is an empty element marking a paragraph boundary. -->
<!ELEMENT Par EMPTY> <!-- this is intentionally empty! -->
<!ELEMENT P EMPTY> <!-- the same as shortcut -->
<!-- And here is an element for forcing a line break, not starting
a new paragraph. -->
<!ELEMENT Br EMPTY> <!-- a forced line break -->
<!-- The following elements mark a word or sentence to be of a certain
kind, such that it can be typeset differently. They are terminal
elements that should only contain character data. But we have to
allow Alt elements for handling special characters. For these
elements we introduce a long name - which is easy to remember -
and a short name - which you may prefer because of the shorter
markup. -->
<!ELEMENT Keyword (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Keyword -->
<!ELEMENT K (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Keyword (shortcut) -->
<!ELEMENT Arg (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Argument -->
<!ELEMENT A (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Argument (shortcut) -->
<!ELEMENT Code (#PCDATA|Alt|A|Arg)*> <!-- GAP code -->
<!ELEMENT C (#PCDATA|Alt|A|Arg)*> <!-- GAP code (shortcut) -->
<!ELEMENT File (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Filename -->
<!ELEMENT F (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- Filename (shortcut) -->
<!ELEMENT Button (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- "Button" (also Menu, Key) -->
<!ELEMENT B (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- "Button" (shortcut) -->
<!ELEMENT Package (#PCDATA|Alt)*> <!-- A package name -->
<!ELEMENT Quoted (%InnerText;)*> <!-- Quoted (in quotes) text -->
<!ELEMENT Q (%InnerText;)*> <!-- Quoted text (shortcut) -->
<!-- The following elements contain mathematical formulae. They are
terminal elements that contain character data in TeX notation. -->
<!-- Math with well defined translation to text output -->
<!ELEMENT M (#PCDATA|A|Arg|Alt)*>
<!-- Normal TeX math mode formula -->
<!ELEMENT Math (#PCDATA|A|Arg|Alt)*>
<!-- TeX displayed math mode formula -->
<!ELEMENT Display (#PCDATA|A|Arg|Alt)*>
<!-- Mode="M" causes <M>-style formatting -->
<!ATTLIST Display Mode CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!-- The following elements contain GAP related text like code,
session logs or examples. They are all terminal elements and
consist of character data which is normally typeset verbatim. The
different types of the elements only control how they are
treated. -->
<!ELEMENT Example (#PCDATA)> <!-- This is subject to the automatic
example checking mechanism -->
<!ELEMENT Log (#PCDATA)> <!-- This not -->
<!ELEMENT Listing (#PCDATA)> <!-- This is just for code listings -->
<!ATTLIST Listing Type CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- a comment about the type of
listed code, may appear in
output -->
<!-- One further verbatim element, this is truely verbatim without
any processing and intended for ASCII substitutes of complicated
displayed formulae or tables. -->
<!ELEMENT Verb (#PCDATA)>
<!-- The following elements are for cross-referencing purposes like
URLs, citations, references, and the index. All these elements
are terminal and need special methods to make up the actual
output during document generation. -->
<!ELEMENT URL (#PCDATA|Alt|Link|LinkText)*> <!-- Link, LinkText
variant for case where text needs further markup -->
<!ATTLIST URL Text CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- This is for output formats
that have links like HTML -->
<!ELEMENT Link (%InnerText;)*> <!-- the URL -->
<!ELEMENT LinkText (%InnerText;)*> <!-- text for links, can contain markup -->
<!-- The following two are actually URLs, but the element name determines
the type. -->
<!ELEMENT Email (#PCDATA|Alt|Link|LinkText)*>
<!ELEMENT Homepage (#PCDATA|Alt|Link|LinkText)*>
<!-- Those who still want to give postal addresses can use the following
element. Use <Br/> for specifying typical line breaks -->
<!ELEMENT Address (#PCDATA|Alt|Br)*>
<!ELEMENT Cite EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Cite Key CDATA #REQUIRED
Where CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Label EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Label Name CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!ELEMENT Ref EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Ref Func CDATA #IMPLIED
Oper CDATA #IMPLIED
Meth CDATA #IMPLIED
Filt CDATA #IMPLIED
Prop CDATA #IMPLIED
Attr CDATA #IMPLIED
Var CDATA #IMPLIED
Fam CDATA #IMPLIED
InfoClass CDATA #IMPLIED
Chap CDATA #IMPLIED
Sect CDATA #IMPLIED
Subsect CDATA #IMPLIED
Appendix CDATA #IMPLIED
Text CDATA #IMPLIED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
BookName CDATA #IMPLIED
Style (Text|Number) #IMPLIED> <!-- normally automatic -->
<!-- Note that only one attribute of Ref is used normally. BookName
and Style can be specified in addition to handle external
references and the typesetting style of the reference. -->
<!-- For explicit index entries (Func and so on should cause an
automatically generated index entry). Use the attributes Key,
Subkey for sorting (simplified, without markup). The Subkey value
also gets printed. Use the optional Subkey element if the printed
version needs some markup. -->
<!ELEMENT Index (%InnerText;|Subkey)*>
<!ATTLIST Index Key CDATA #IMPLIED
Subkey CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Subkey (%InnerText;)*>
<!-- ==================================================================
The following describes the normal documentation text which can
occur at various places in the document. It does not contain
further sectioning elements. In addition to InnerText it can contain
environments like enumerations, lists, and such.
================================================================== -->
<!ENTITY % Text "%InnerText; | List | Enum | Table">
<!ELEMENT Item ( %Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Mark ( %InnerText;)*>
<!ELEMENT BigMark ( %InnerText;)*>
<!ELEMENT List ( ((Mark,Item)|(BigMark,Item)|Item)+ )>
<!ATTLIST List Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Enum ( Item+ )>
<!ATTLIST Enum Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Table ( Caption?, (Row | HorLine)+ )>
<!ATTLIST Table Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED
Align CDATA #REQUIRED> <!-- A TeX tabular string -->
<!-- We allow | and l,c,r, nothing else -->
<!ELEMENT Row ( Item+ )>
<!ELEMENT HorLine EMPTY>
<!ELEMENT Caption ( %InnerText;)*>
<!-- ==================================================================
We start defining some things within the overall structure:
================================================================== -->
<!-- The TitlePage consists of several sub-elements: -->
<!ELEMENT TitlePage (Title, Subtitle?, Version?, TitleComment?,
Author+, Date?, Address?, Abstract?, Copyright?,
Acknowledgements? , Colophon? )>
<!ELEMENT Title (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Subtitle (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Version (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT TitleComment (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Author (%Text;)*> <!-- There may be more than one Author! -->
<!ELEMENT Date (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Abstract (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Copyright (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Acknowledgements (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Colophon (%Text;)*>
<!-- The following things just specify some information about the
corresponding parts of the Book: -->
<!ELEMENT TableOfContents EMPTY>
<!ELEMENT Bibliography EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Bibliography Databases CDATA #REQUIRED
Style CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT TheIndex EMPTY>
<!-- ==================================================================
The Ignore element can be used everywhere to include further
information in a GAPDoc document which is not intended for the
standard converters (e.g., source code, not yet finished stuff,
and so on. This information can be extracted by special converter
routines, more precise information about the content of an Ignore
element can be given by the "Remark" attribute.
================================================================== -->
<!ELEMENT Ignore (%Text;| Chapter | Section | Subsection | ManSection |
Heading)*>
<!ATTLIST Ignore Remark CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!-- ==================================================================
Now we go on with the overall structure by defining the sectioning
structure, which includes the Synopsis element:
================================================================== -->
<!ELEMENT Subsection (%Text;| Heading)*>
<!ATTLIST Subsection Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
<!ELEMENT ManSection ( Heading?,
((Func, Returns?) | (Oper, Returns?) |
(Meth, Returns?) | (Filt, Returns?) |
(Prop, Returns?) | (Attr, Returns?) |
Var | Fam | InfoClass)+, Description )>
<!ATTLIST ManSection Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
<!ELEMENT Returns (%Text;)*>
<!ELEMENT Description (%Text;)*>
<!-- Note that the ManSection element is actually a subsection with
respect to labelling, referencing, and counting of sectioning
elements. -->
<!ELEMENT Func EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Func Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!-- Note that Arg contains the full list of arguments, including
optional parts, which are denoted by square brackets [].
Arguments are separated by whitespace, commas count as
whitespace. -->
<!-- Note further that although Name and Label are CDATA (and not ID)
Label must make up a unique identifier. -->
<!ELEMENT Oper EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Oper Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Meth EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Meth Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Filt EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Filt Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #IMPLIED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED
Type CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Prop EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Prop Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Attr EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Attr Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Arg CDATA #REQUIRED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Var EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Var Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Fam EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST Fam Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT InfoClass EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST InfoClass Name CDATA #REQUIRED
Label CDATA #IMPLIED
Comm CDATA #IMPLIED>
<!ELEMENT Heading (%InnerText;)*>
<!ELEMENT Section (%Text;| Heading | Subsection | ManSection)*>
<!ATTLIST Section Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
<!ELEMENT Chapter (%Text;| Heading | Section)*>
<!ATTLIST Chapter Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
<!-- Note that the entity %InnerText; is documentation that contains
neither sectioning elements nor environments like enumerations,
but only formulae, labels, references, citations, and other
terminal elements. -->
<!ELEMENT Appendix (%Text;| Heading | Section)*>
<!ATTLIST Appendix Label CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- For reference purposes -->
<!-- Note that an Appendix is exactly the same as a Chapter. They
differ only in the numbering. -->
<!-- ==================================================================
At last we define the overall structure of a gapdoc Book:
================================================================== -->
<!ELEMENT Body ( %Text;| Chapter | Section )*>
<!ELEMENT Book (TitlePage,
TableOfContents?,
Body,
Appendix*,
Bibliography?,
TheIndex?)>
<!ATTLIST Book Name CDATA #REQUIRED>
<!-- Note that the entity %Text; is documentation that contains
no further sectioning elements but possibly environments like
enumerations, and formulae, labels, references, and citations.
-->
<!-- ============================================================== -->
\end{Verbatim}
}
\chapter{\textcolor{Chapter }{The File \texttt{bibxmlext.dtd}}}\label{bibxmlextdtd}
\logpage{[ "C", 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7B5D840781E99076}{}
{
For easier reference we repeat here the complete content of the file \texttt{bibxmlext.dtd} which is explained in \ref{BibXMLformat}.
\begin{Verbatim}[fontsize=\small,frame=single,label=bibxmlext.dtd]
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!--
- (C) Frank Lbeck (http://www.math.rwth-aachen.de/~Frank.Luebeck)
-
- The BibXMLext data format.
-
- This DTD expresses XML markup similar to the BibTeX language
- specified for LaTeX, or actually its content model.
-
- It is a variation of a file bibxml.dtd developed by the project
- http://bibtexml.sf.net/
-
- For documentation on BibTeX, see
- http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/distribs/doc/
-
- A previous version of the code originally developed by
- Vidar Bronken Gundersen, http://bibtexml.sf.net/
- Reuse and repurposing is approved as long as this
- notification appears with the code.
-
-->
<!-- ..................................................................... -->
<!-- Main structure -->
<!-- key-value pairs as in BibTeX @string entries are put in empty elements
(but here they can be used for parts of an entry field as well) -->
<!ELEMENT string EMPTY>
<!ATTLIST string
key CDATA #REQUIRED
value CDATA #REQUIRED >
<!-- entry may contain one of the bibliographic types. -->
<!ELEMENT entry ( article | book | booklet |
manual | techreport |
mastersthesis | phdthesis |
inbook | incollection |
proceedings | inproceedings |
conference |
unpublished | misc ) >
<!ATTLIST entry
id CDATA #REQUIRED >
<!-- file is the documents top element. -->
<!ELEMENT file ( string | entry )* >
<!-- ..................................................................... -->
<!-- Parameter entities -->
<!-- these are additional elements often used, but not included in the
standard BibTeX distribution, these must be added to the
bibliography styles, otherwise these fields will be omitted by
the formatter, we allow an arbitrary number of 'other' elements
to specify any further information -->
<!ENTITY % n.user " abstract?, affiliation?,
contents?, copyright?,
(isbn | issn)?,
keywords?, language?, lccn?,
location?, mrnumber?, mrclass?, mrreviewer?,
price?, size?, url?, category?, other* ">
<!ENTITY % n.common "key?, annotate?, crossref?,
%n.user;">
<!-- content model used more than once -->
<!ENTITY % n.InProceedings "author, title, booktitle,
year, editor?,
(volume | number)?,
series?, pages?, address?,
month?, organization?, publisher?,
note?, %n.common;">
<!ENTITY % n.PHDThesis "author, title, school,
year, type?, address?, month?,
note?, %n.common;">
<!-- ..................................................................... -->
<!-- Entries in the BibTeX database -->
<!-- [article] An article from a journal or magazine.
- Required fields: author, title, journal, year.
- Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note. -->
<!ELEMENT article (author, title, journal,
year, volume?, number?, pages?,
month?, note?, %n.common;)
>
<!-- [book] A book with an explicit publisher.
- Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year.
- Optional fields: volume or number, series, address,
- edition, month, note. -->
<!ELEMENT book ((author | editor), title,
publisher, year, (volume | number)?,
series?, address?, edition?, month?,
note?, %n.common;)
>
<!-- [booklet] A work that is printed and bound, but without a named
- publisher or sponsoring institution
- Required field: title.
- Optional fields: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note. -->
<!ELEMENT booklet (author?, title,
howpublished?, address?, month?,
year?, note?, %n.common;)
>
<!-- [conference] The same as INPROCEEDINGS,
- included for Scribe compatibility. -->
<!ELEMENT conference (%n.InProceedings;)
>
<!-- [inbook] A part of a book, which may be a chapter (or section or
- whatever) and/or a range of pages.
- Required fields: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages,
- publisher, year.
- Optional fields: volume or number, series, type, address,
- edition, month, note. -->
<!ELEMENT inbook ((author | editor), title,
((chapter, pages?) | pages),
publisher, year, (volume |
number)?, series?, type?,
address?, edition?, month?,
note?, %n.common;)
>
<!--
- > I want to express that the elements a and/or b are legal that is one
- > of them or both must be present in the document instance (see the
- > element content for BibTeX entry `InBook').
- > How do I specify this in my DTD?
-
- Dave Peterson:
- in content model: ((a , b?) | b) if order matters
- ((a , b?) | (b , a?)) otherwise
-->
<!-- [incollection] A part of a book having its own title.
- Required fields: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year.
- Optional fields: editor, volume or number, series, type,
- chapter, pages, address, edition, month, note. -->
<!ELEMENT incollection (author, title,
booktitle, publisher, year,
editor?, (volume | number)?,
series?, type?, chapter?,
pages?, address?, edition?,
month?, note?,
%n.common;)
>
<!-- [inproceedings] An article in a conference proceedings.
- Required fields: author, title, booktitle, year.
- Optional fields: editor, volume or number, series, pages,
- address, month, organization, publisher, note. -->
<!ELEMENT inproceedings (%n.InProceedings;)
>
<!-- [manual] Technical documentation
- Required field: title.
- Optional fields: author, organization, address,
- edition, month, year, note. -->
<!ELEMENT manual (author?, title,
organization?, address?, edition?,
month?, year?, note?, %n.common;)
>
<!-- [mastersthesis] A Master's thesis.
- Required fields: author, title, school, year.
- Optional fields: type, address, month, note. -->
<!ELEMENT mastersthesis (%n.PHDThesis;)
>
<!-- [misc] Use this type when nothing else fits.
- Required fields: none.
- Optional fields: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note. -->
<!ELEMENT misc (author?, title?,
howpublished?, month?, year?, note?,
%n.common;)
>
<!-- [phdthesis] A PhD thesis.
- Required fields: author, title, school, year.
- Optional fields: type, address, month, note. -->
<!ELEMENT phdthesis (%n.PHDThesis;)
>
<!-- [proceedings] The proceedings of a conference.
- Required fields: title, year.
- Optional fields: editor, volume or number, series,
- address, month, organization, publisher, note. -->
<!ELEMENT proceedings (editor?, title, year,
(volume | number)?, series?,
address?, month?, organization?,
publisher?, note?, %n.common;)
>
<!-- [techreport] A report published by a school or other institution,
- usually numbered within a series.
- Required fields: author, title, institution, year.
- Optional fields: type, number, address, month, note. -->
<!ELEMENT techreport (author, title,
institution, year, type?, number?,
address?, month?, note?, %n.common;)
>
<!-- [unpublished] A document having an author and title, but not
- formally published.
- Required fields: author, title, note.
- Optional fields: month, year. -->
<!ELEMENT unpublished (author, title, note,
month?, year?, %n.common;)
>
<!-- ..................................................................... -->
<!-- Fields from the standard bibliography styles -->
<!--
- Below is a description of all fields recognized by the standard
- bibliography styles. An entry can also contain other fields, which
- are ignored by those styles.
-
- [address] Usually the address of the publisher or other type of
- institution For major publishing houses, van~Leunen recommends
- omitting the information entirely. For small publishers, on the other
- hand, you can help the reader by giving the complete address.
-
- [annote] An annotation It is not used by the standard bibliography
- styles, but may be used by others that produce an annotated
- bibliography.
-
- [author] The name(s) of the author(s), here *not* in the format
- described in the LaTeX book. Contains elements <name> which in turn
- contains elements <first>, <last> for the first name (or first names,
- fully written or as initials, and including middle initials) and
- the last name.
-
- [booktitle] Title of a book, part of which is being cited. See the
- LaTeX book for how to type titles. For book entries, use the title
- field instead.
-
- [chapter] A chapter (or section or whatever) number.
-
- [crossref] The database key of the entry being cross referenced.
-
- [edition] The edition of a book-for example, ``Second''. This
- should be an ordinal, and should have the first letter capitalized, as
- shown here; the standard styles convert to lower case when necessary.
-
- [editor] Name(s) of editor(s), typed as indicated in the LaTeX book.
- If there is also an author field, then the editor field gives the
- editor of the book or collection in which the reference appears.
-
- [howpublished] How something strange has been published. The first
- word should be capitalized.
-
- [institution] The sponsoring institution of a technical report.
-
- [journal] A journal name. Abbreviations are provided for many
- journals; see the Local Guide.
-
- [key] Used for alphabetizing, cross referencing, and creating a label
- when the ``author'' information (described in Section [ref: ] is
- missing. This field should not be confused with the key that appears
- in the \cite command and at the beginning of the database entry.
-
- [month] The month in which the work was published or, for an
- unpublished work, in which it was written. You should use the
- standard three-letter abbreviation, as described in Appendix B.1.3 of
- the LaTeX book.
-
- [note] Any additional information that can help the reader. The first
- word should be capitalized.
-
- [number] The number of a journal, magazine, technical report, or of a
- work in a series. An issue of a journal or magazine is usually
- identified by its volume and number; the organization that issues a
- technical report usually gives it a number; and sometimes books are
- given numbers in a named series.
-
- [organization] The organization that sponsors a conference or that
- publishes a manual.
-
- [pages] One or more page numbers or range of numbers, such as 42-111
- or 7,41,73-97 or 43+ (the `+' in this last example indicates pages
- following that don't form a simple range). To make it easier to
- maintain Scribe-compatible databases, the standard styles convert a
- single dash (as in 7-33) to the double dash used in TeX to denote
- number ranges (as in 7-33). Here, we suggest to use the entity
- – for a dash in page ranges.
-
- [publisher] The publisher's name.
-
- [school] The name of the school where a thesis was written.
-
- [series] The name of a series or set of books. When citing an entire
- book, the the title field gives its title and an optional series field
- gives the name of a series or multi-volume set in which the book is
- published.
-
- [title] The work's title. For mathematical formulae use the <M> or
- <Math> elements explained below (and LaTeX code in the content, without
- surrounding '$').
-
- [type] The type of a technical report-for example, ``Research
- Note''.
-
- [volume] The volume of a journal or multivolume book.
-
- [year] The year of publication or, for an unpublished work, the year
- it was written. Generally it should consist of four numerals, such as
- 1984, although the standard styles can handle any year whose last four
- nonpunctuation characters are numerals, such as `(about 1984)'.
-->
<!-- Here is the main extension compared to the original BibXML definition
from which is DTD is derived: We want to allow more markup in some
elements such that we can use the bibliography for high quality
output in other formats than LaTeX.
- <M> and <Math>, mathematical formulae: Specify LaTeX code for "simple"
formulae as content of <M> elements; "simple" means that they can be
translated to a fairly readable ASCII representation as explained in
the GAPDoc documentation on "<M>".
More complicated formulae are given as content of <Math> elements.
(Think about an <Alt> alternative for text or HTML representations.)
- <URL>: use these elements to specify URLs, they can be properly
converted to links if possible in an output format (in that case
the Text attribute is used for the visible text).
- <value key="..."/>: substituted by the value-attribute specified
in a <string key="..." value="..."/> element. Can be used anywhere,
not only for complete fields as in BibTeX.
- <C> protect case changes: should be used instead of {}'s which are
used in BibTeX title fields to protect the case of letters from
changes.
- <Alt Only="...">, <Alt Not="...">, alternatives for different
output formats: Use this to specify alternatives, the GAPDoc
utilities will do some special handling for "Text", "HTML",
and "BibTeX" as output type.
- <Wrap Name="...">, generic wrapper for other markup:
Use this for any other type of markup you are interested in. The
GAPDoc utilities will ignore the markup, but provide a hook
to do install handler functions for them.
-->
<!ELEMENT M (#PCDATA | Alt)* > <!-- math with simple text
representation, in LaTeX -->
<!ELEMENT Math (#PCDATA | Alt)* > <!-- other math in LaTeX -->
<!ELEMENT URL (#PCDATA | Alt | Link | LinkText)* > <!-- an URL -->
<!ATTLIST URL Text CDATA #IMPLIED> <!-- text to be printed
(default is content) -->
<!ELEMENT value EMPTY > <!-- placeholder for value given .. -->
<!ATTLIST value key CDATA #REQUIRED > <!-- .. by key, defined in a string
element -->
<!ELEMENT C (#PCDATA | value | Alt |
M | Math | Wrap | URL)* > <!-- protect from case changes -->
<!ELEMENT Alt (#PCDATA | value | C | Alt |
M | Math | Wrap | URL)* > <!-- specify alternatives for
various types of output -->
<!ATTLIST Alt Only CDATA #IMPLIED
Not CDATA #IMPLIED > <!-- specify output types in comma and
whitespace separated list (use exactly one of Only or Not) -->
<!ENTITY % withMURL "(#PCDATA | value | M | Math | Wrap | URL | C | Alt )*" >
<!ELEMENT Wrap %withMURL; > <!-- a generic wrapper -->
<!ATTLIST Wrap Name CDATA #REQUIRED > <!-- needs a 'Name' attribute -->
<!ELEMENT address %withMURL; >
<!-- here we don't want the complicated definition from the LaTeX book,
use markup for first/last name(s): a <name> element for each
author which contains <first> (optional), <last> elements: -->
<!ELEMENT author (name)* >
<!ELEMENT name (first?, last) >
<!ELEMENT first (#PCDATA) >
<!ELEMENT last (#PCDATA) >
<!ELEMENT booktitle %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT chapter %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT edition %withMURL; >
<!-- same as for author field -->
<!ELEMENT editor (name)* >
<!ELEMENT howpublished %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT institution %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT journal %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT month %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT note %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT number %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT organization %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT pages %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT publisher %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT school %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT series %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT title %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT type %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT volume %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT year (#PCDATA) >
<!-- These were not listed in the documentation for entry content, but
- appeared in the list of fields in the BibTeX documentation -->
<!ELEMENT annotate %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT crossref %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT key (#PCDATA) >
<!-- ..................................................................... -->
<!-- Other popular fields
-
- From: http://www.ecst.csuchico.edu/~jacobsd/bib/formats/bibtex.html
- BibTeX is extremely popular, and many people have used it to store
- information. Here is a list of some of the more common fields:
-
- [affiliation] The authors affiliation.
- [abstract] An abstract of the work.
- [contents] A Table of Contents
- [copyright] Copyright information.
- [ISBN] The International Standard Book Number.
- [ISSN] The International Standard Serial Number.
- Used to identify a journal.
- [keywords] Key words used for searching or possibly for annotation.
- [language] The language the document is in.
- [location] A location associated with the entry,
- such as the city in which a conference took place.
- [LCCN] The Library of Congress Call Number.
- I've also seen this as lib-congress.
- [mrnumber] The Mathematical Reviews number.
- [mrclass] The Mathematical Reviews class.
- [mrreviewer] The Mathematical Reviews reviewer.
- [price] The price of the document.
- [size] The physical dimensions of a work.
- [URL] The WWW Universal Resource Locator that points to the item being
- referenced. This often is used for technical reports to point to the
- ftp site where the postscript source of the report is located.
-
- When using BibTeX with LaTeX you need
- BibTeX style files to print these data.
-->
<!ELEMENT abstract %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT affiliation %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT contents %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT copyright %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT isbn (#PCDATA) >
<!ELEMENT issn (#PCDATA) >
<!ELEMENT keywords %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT language %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT lccn (#PCDATA) >
<!ELEMENT location %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT mrnumber %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT mrclass %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT mrreviewer %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT price %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT size %withMURL; >
<!ELEMENT url %withMURL; >
<!-- Added by Zeger W. Hendrikse
- [category] Category of this bibitem
-->
<!ELEMENT category %withMURL; >
<!-- A container element [other] for any further information, a description
- of the type of data must be given in the attribute 'type'
-->
<!ELEMENT other %withMURL; >
<!ATTLIST other
type CDATA #REQUIRED >
<!-- ..................................................................... -->
<!-- Predefined/reserved character entities -->
<!ENTITY amp "&#38;">
<!ENTITY lt "&#60;">
<!ENTITY gt ">">
<!ENTITY apos "'">
<!ENTITY quot """>
<!-- Some more generally useful entities -->
<!ENTITY nbsp " ">
<!ENTITY copyright "©">
<!ENTITY ndash "–">
<!-- ..................................................................... -->
<!-- End of BibXMLext dtd -->
\end{Verbatim}
}
\def\bibname{References\logpage{[ "Bib", 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X7A6F98FD85F02BFE}{}
}
\bibliographystyle{alpha}
\bibliography{gapdocbib.xml}
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{References}
\def\indexname{Index\logpage{[ "Ind", 0, 0 ]}
\hyperdef{L}{X83A0356F839C696F}{}
}
\cleardoublepage
\phantomsection
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
\printindex
\newpage
\immediate\write\pagenrlog{["End"], \arabic{page}];}
\immediate\closeout\pagenrlog
\end{document}
|